Alspa C80-35 Programming Manual
Contents
1. 4 5 54d Parameters sesso ce b eee PEE REN ee Rie aa eS CEU Ne eR eden 4 5 3 7 2 Valid Memory Types luec e et Binds EEE 4 5 5 8 BPOS WORD espe 4 5 5 8 1 Parameters rand 4 5 5 82 Valid Memory 4 5 59 MSKCMP WORD DWORD 519 1 oH 5 9 2 Valid M mory Types eor eR ead acd RE be Taree eek os 4 5 DATA MOVE FUNCTIONS 4 607 6 1 MOVE INT 4 60 6 ld P arameters li ke PEE 4 6 6 12 Valid Memory Types 4 6 62 BLKMOV INT WORD 4 6 62 1 eee a a pu 4 6 622 Valid Memory Types ienis eee e me Rr rx ER E EE S s 4 6 63 BLKCLR 4 6 634 Parameters Roe sd i e Eg o Eee sued 4 6 6 32 Valid Memory 4 6 64 SHFR BIT GAN Parameters2. 4 11 9 9 4 2 Change Read Date and Time using BCD Format 4 11 9 9 4 3 To Change Read Date and Time using Packed ASCII with Embedded Colons Format sss sessi sess ewe bx e e ee 4 11 9 9 5 SVCREQ 13 Shut Down Stop 4 11 9 9 6 SVCREQ 14 Clear Fault Tables 4 11 997 SVCREQ 15 Read Last Logged Fault Table Entry 4 11 9 9 8 SVCREQ 16 Read Elapsed Time 4 11 9 9 9 SVCREQ 18 Read I O Override Status 4 11 9 9 10 SVCREQ 23 Read Master Checksum 4 12 9 9 11 SVCREQ 26 30 Interrogate I O 4 12 9 9 12 SVCREQ 29 Read Elapsed Power Down Time 4 12 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Contents PIDE ssc bi poe ote rete Ba a eee dg 4 12 9 10 1 Parameters occ ke Rex ERREUR Gee SHER TUES 4 12 9 10 2 Valid Memory Types sre beet eh pH e ome ree gee 4 12 9 10 3 PID Parameter Bloc nne Gah e A per 4 12 9 10 4 Operation of the PID Instruction
3. 3 194 Table 4 4 PID Parameters Overview 4 12 Table 4 5 PID Parameters 4 127 Table 4 5 PID Parameters Details Continued 4 12 Table 4 5 PID Parameters Details Continued 4 2 Table 4 5 PID Parameters Details Continued 4 130 Table Instruction Timing A 7 Table Instruction Timing Continued Table Instruction Timing Continued A F Table A 1 Instruction Timing Continued Table Instruction Timing Continued A 7 Table Instruction Timing Continued A T Table Instruction Timing Continued A 87 Table A 2 Instruction Sizes for 351 and 352 CPUs A 17 Table 1 PLC Fault Groups isses En Rr XE RE ERREUR B f Table B 2 PLC Fault Actions 4 5604 55 24 ob eR eee FX
4. 4MOVE 4 INT INT CONST IN Q NOON CONST IN Q MIN SEC 404608 LEN 400000 LEN 100001 100001 _ 11 510016 510001 4 MOVE 4 MOVE_ 4 SVC 4 INT INT REQ CONST IN 580300 CONST IN Q RO301 CONST 00000 LEN 00001 LEN 00007 100001 100001 380300 2 I 1570001 510017 1 1 AND_ _ ADD_ WORD INT RO303 11 R0303 RO303 IN Q R0303 CONST 12 NOON 12 OOFF __ 0 001 510017 1 1 1 MOVE _ MOVE _ Svc_ INT INT REQ MIN SEC IN 980304 CONST IN 580300 CONST FNC LEN 00001 LEN 00007 190002 100001 _ _ RO300 PARM 4 110 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 9 4 1 Parameter Block Contents Parameter block contents for the different data formats are shown on the following pages For both data formats Hours are stored in 24 hour format Day of the week is a numeric value
5. 4 4 5 ld dep hip nen 4 4 9 122 Memory Types eed 44 52 XOR WORD oouo essex ed detail mieu vob ap uie ek aes 4 4 2 2 15 PardmetetsSzcn us eec lel deus Anas evading Aedes E Re eL 4 4 5 2 2 Valid Memory RR Y RR M ER eee rus 4 4 5 3 NOT WORD nii eae aes 4 4 8 34 RU e OE a ee he aoe 4 46 Page 14 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Contents 5 32 Valid Memory Types isis kb e owe toed CERE HR deed eed eee 4 4 5 4 SHL and SHR 4 4 524 1 Parameters eed ade b ele ae 4 4 5 4 2 Valid Memory TY Pes enne eee genie Sot 44 55 ROL and ROR E 5 RED s 392 Memory Types eoe e ded ret os eom doter eoe dedere iia deae 4 5 5 6 BIST WORD cedere v teo se uda 4 5 5 6 ssepe p Aot Rae Ra oe Plo arcte Parc ntis naa waste 4 5 5 5 2 Valid Memory Types sucio o e rr RERUM RAS Tee ee een e ees 4 5 57 BSET and BCLR
6. CONST DNX Example 2 Using bit memory for SR and DS 0011 M0017 of the array 0009 24 is read and then written to Q0026 00032 of the array Q0022 00037 510001 1 1 MOVE 310009 SR DS 500022 LEN 00016 CONST SNX 00003 00005 CONST N 00007 CONST DNX 4 78 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Example 3 Using word memory for SR and DS the third least significant bit of 0001 through the second least significant bit of 0002 of the array containing all 16 bits of 0001 and four bits of R0002 is read and then written into the fifth least significant bit of RO100 through the fourth least significant bit of RO101 of the array containing all 16 bits of 0100 and four bits of RO101 CEES 510001 1 1 ARRAY MOVE BIT 380001 SR DS 380100 LEN 100020 CONST SNX 00003 00005 CONST N 00016 CONST DNX 7 3 SRCH_EQ and SRCH NE INT DINT BYTE WORD SRCH GT and SRCH LT SRCH GE and SRCH LE Use the appropriate Search function listed below to se
7. 2 3 45 Tim Tick Contacts ludos nel c eI Rune E REG RECO WERE dE 2 307 5 SYSTEM SECURITY uis dde a E ds e E e 2 3 5 1 Passwords lt lt dereire dE dud ahis 2 3 5 2 Privilege Level Change Requests 2 317 5 3 Locking Unlocking Subroutines 2 337 6 ALSPA C80 35 C80 25 AND MICRO PLC SYSTEM 2 34 6 1 Model 35 Modules 2 34 6 2 Data Formats i esse irita stt are KE ace e 2 307 6 3 Default Conditions for Model 35 Output Modules 2 3 6 4 Diagnostic cicer ex RI Ope ede dace tee wee eet opu edes 2 3 6 5 Global Data usse ea ede ea d a Eun lee rh ie 2 3 6 6 Model25I O Modules 2 31 6 7 da Ce ded P4 ons ds a E ln 2387 CHAPTER 3 FAULT EXPLANATIONS AND CORRECTION 3 1 1 FAULT HANDLING RR ete cnra 3 40 1 1 Alami Processor 3 7 1 2 Classes of Fault elu a de ea ee 3 4 1 3 System Reaction to 5 3 T 3 1
8. 4 4 1 9 Positive Transition Coil t 4 1 10 Negative Transition Coll amp 4 4 1 11 SET Coil S 4 4 1 12 RESET Coil R 4 07 1 13 Retentive SET Coil SM 4 07 1 14 Retentive RESET Coil RM 4 1 1 15 Einks NEU e eus Ped obe eros e Bee 4 1 16 Continuation Coils lt gt and Contacts lt gt pv 1E 2 TIMERS AND COUNTERS amt er toe eda e pn be RU Roe ee 4 2 1 Function Block Data Required for Timers and Counters 4 97 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 13 Contents 2 2 ONDER ooo ERREUR Oh bea ee awe edie 4 1 22M Parameters yes dig ao ERREUR PR hd 4 1 2 2 2 Valid Memory Types eresse eh RR ae head Pe Mae iad Rodeos 4 1 2 3 EDI ed xe 4 1 JPardmetetsS UR beta tem 4 1 2 32 Valid nadia HEN COE 4 1 24
9. d tes ca o P Re 3 1 3 2 FantACUOm iode REOR Care E Tq 3 14 Fault References 2 5 ERROR ROO ARA B 1 5 Fault Reference 3 1 1 6 Additional Fault Effects 3 1 1 7 3 67 Page 12 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Contents 1 8 I O Fault Table Display 3 1 9 Accessing Additional Fault Information 2 PLC FAULT TABLE EXPLANATIONS 3 47 2 1 Fault Actions eces ceci e linde kae e ERE e 3 107 2 2 Loss of or Missing Option Module 3 107 2 3 Reset of Addition of or Extra Option Module 3 107 2 4 System Configuration 3 10 2 5 Option Module Software 3 117 2 6 Program Block Checksum Failure 3 17 2 1 Low Battery Signal ree ee Rx esce ex ewe 3 177 2 8 Constant Sweep Time Exceeded 3 117 2 9 A
10. Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function n 96S A SB SC only 96S cannot be used Example In the following example at power up 32 words of Q memory 512 points beginning at 00001 are filled with Zeros FST_SCN 1 1 CLR_ WORD Q0001 IN LEN 190032 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual 4 65 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 6 4 SHFR BIT WORD Use the Shift Register SHFR function to shift one or more data words or data bits from a reference location into a specified area of memory For example one word might be shifted into an area of memory with a specified length of five words As a result of this shift another word of data would be shifted out of the end of the memory area When assigning reference addresses overlapping input and output reference address ranges in multi word functions may produce unexpected results The SHFR function has four input parameters and two output parameters The reset input R takes precedence over the function enable input When the reset is active all references beginning at the shift register ST up to the length specified for LEN are filled with zeros If the function receives power flow and reset is not active each bit or word of the shift register is moved to the next highest reference The last
11. service number FNC beginning reference PARM 9 9 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When enable is energized the request service request is performed FNC FNC contains the constant or reference for the requested service PARM contains the beginning reference for the parameter block for the requested service The ok output energized when the function is performed without error ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 105 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 9 2 Valid Memory Types a a Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Example In the following example when the enabling input 10001 is ON SVCREQ function number 7 is called with the parameter block located starting at R0001 Output coil 00001 is set ON if the operation succeeds 510001 aa 1 1 1 CONST el Q0001 00007 80001 PARM 9 9 3 SVCREQ 6 Change Read Number of Words to Checksum Use the SVCREQ function with function number 6 in order to Read the current word count Set anew word count Successful execution will occur unless some number other than 0 or 1 is entered as the requested operation see below For the Checksum Task functions the paramete
12. ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 39 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 5 BIT OPERATION FUNCTIONS Bit operation functions perform comparison logical and move operations on bit strings The AND OR XOR and NOT functions operate on a single word The remaining bit operation functions may operate on multiple words with a maximum string length of 256 words All bit operation functions require WORD data Although data must be specified in 16 bit increments these functions operate on data as a continuous string of bits with bit of the first word being the Least Significant Bit LSB The last bit of the last word is the Most Significant Bit MSB For example if you specified three words of data beginning at reference RO100 it would be operated on as 48 contiguous bits wo s pis To F9 8 7 T8 D 2 3 nnm rre npn pep pep prp pep e n e pee pe pe Ip e pe Overlapping input and output reference address ranges in multi word functions may produce unexpected results Page 4 40 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set The following bit operation functions are described in this paragraph Abbreviation Function Description Page AND Logical AND Ifa bit in bit string I1 and the corresponding bit in bit string 12 are both 4 41
13. Value Day of the Week 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday 9 9 4 2 To Change Read Date and Time using BCD Format In BCD format each of the time and date items occupies a single byte This format requires six words The last byte of the sixth word is not used When setting the date and time this byte is ignored when reading date and time the function returns a null character 00 Example output parameter block Read Date and Time in BCD format High Byte Low Byte Sun July 3 1988 at 2 45 30 p m 1 change or 0 read address 0 1 address 1 month year address 2 07 88 hours day of month address 3 14 03 seconds minutes address 4 30 45 null day of week address 5 00 01 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 111 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 9 4 3 To Change Read Date and Time using Packed ASCII with Embedded Colons Format In Packed ASCII format each digit of the time and date items is an ASCII formatted byte In addition spaces and colons are embedded into the data to permit it to be transferred unchanged to a printing or display device This format requires 12 words High Byte Low Byte 1 change or 0 read 3 year year month space space month day of month day of month hours
14. ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual 11 Contents 2 3 Transitions and Overrides 2 20 2 4 Retentiveness of Data 2 20 25 Data Ga dibs daw a 2 217 2 6 System Status References 2 227 2 7 Function Block Structure 2 2 2 7 1 Format of Ladder Logic 2 2 2 7 2 Format of Program Function Blocks 2 2 2 7 3 Function Block Parameters 2 2 274 Power Flow In and Out of a Function 2 2 3 POWER UP AND POWER DOWN SEQUENCES 22T S Power Up isora aig erg epa tercii acie areis 2 27 3 2 Power DOoWi edo m ith ies ERG 2 24 4 CLOCKS AND TIMERS 1 RR awk weed TERRE 2 24 4 1 Bl psed Clock sand edi ek w Led eS 2 24 4 2 Time of Day Clock Model 331 and Model 340 341 2 29 4 3 Watchdog Timer 2 30 4 4 Constant Sweep Timer
15. o 4 6 642 Valid Memory Typ s siis eee ed eee ee la REESE ERI owes 4 6 6 5 BITSEQ vd cun RE E 6 5 1 Memory Required for a Bit Sequencer 4 67 CHAPTER 5 ALSPA 8 25 35 05 INSTRUCTION SET 4 710 0 5 2 EEE T MEN Ma EE ae Ree 4 7 6 3 3 Vahd Memory Types orreri siner oi ee eed idee 4 7 6 6 COMMREQ aaa end quta 4 7 06 1 Command Block cse Io E 4 7 6 6 2 Parameters soe oes HT E 6 6 3 Vahd Memory 4 7 7 TABLE FUNCTIONS recane eee cat s ee qo 7 4 ARRAY MOVE INT DINT BIT BYTE WORD 4 743 Wilde iique iH 7 1 2 Valid Memory Types isset RR eR rad br c ER DERE RA 4 7 7 2 SRCH EQ and SRCH NE INT DINT BYTE WORD SRCH GT and SRCH LT SRCH GE and SRCH LE 4 7 di Parametere ge eet ter Ee ee 4 8 22 Valid Memory manr eR pos 4 8 0 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual
16. 2 SFT CPU 2 279 SFT FLT 2 2 SFT SIO 2 2 STOR ER 2 SY FLT 2 2 SY FULL 2 SY PRES 2 2 T 100MS 2 27 T 10MS 2 217 T MIN 2 2 T SEC 2 2 T T 100MS 2 27 T 10MS 2 27 T_MIN 2 27 T_SEC 2 27 Table functions 4 7 ARRAY MOVE 4 a search less than or equal function 4 79 SRCH_EQ 4 7 SRCH_GE 4 7 SRCH_GT 4 17 SRCH LT 4 SRCH NE 4 TAN 4 3 Tangent function 4 30 Temporary references discrete 2 1 Tj Time of day clock 2 24 Time tick contacts 2 307 Timers 2 24 4 constant sweep timer 2 37 function block data 4 7 OFDT 4 1 ONDTR 4 time tick contacts 2 3 TMR 4 1 Watchdog timer 2 30 Timing instruction A 4 1 9 Transitions 2 207 Troubleshooting 3 accessing additional fault information 3 CTRL F to display hexadecimal fault information 3 B 3 B hexadecimal display of fault information 3 7B 33B T O fault table 3 fault table explanations 3 187 interpreting a fault B a non configurable faults 3 107 PLC fault table 3 PLC fault table explanations 3 17 TRUN 4 80 Truncate function 4 887 U Up counter 4 13 UPCTR 4 197 User references 2 1 analog inputs 2 1 analog outputs 2 discrete inputs 2 1 discrete internal 2 discrete outputs 2 1 discrete references 2 discrete temporary aH global data 2 1 register references 2
17. 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual 4 43 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 5 2 XOR WORD The Exclusive OR function is used to compare each bit in bit string I1 with the corresponding bit in string 12 If the bits are different 1 is placed in the corresponding position in the output bit string Each scan that power is received the function examines each bit in string I1 and the corresponding bit in string 12 beginning at the least significant bit in each For each two bits examined if only one is 1 then a 1 is placed in the corresponding location in bit string Q The XOR function passes power flow to the right whenever power is received If string I2 and output string Q begin at the same reference a 1 placed in string I1 will cause the corresponding bit in string I2 to alternate between and 1 changing state with each scan as long as power is received Longer cycles can be programmed by pulsing the power flow to the function at twice the desired rate of flashing the power flow pulse should be one scan long one shot type coil or self resetting timer The XOR function is useful for quickly comparing two bit strings or to blink a group of bits at the rate of one ON state per two scans enable ok WORD input parameter I1 I1 output parameter input parameter I2 I2 5 2 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is en
18. 4 12 9 10 5 Internal ParametersinRefArray 4 13 9 10 6 PID Algorithm Selection PIDISA or PIDIND Gains 4 13 9 10 7 CV Amplitude and Rate Limits 4 13 9 10 8 Sample Period and PID Block Scheduling 4 13 9 10 9 Determining the Process Characteristics 4 13 9 10 10 Setting User Parameters Including Tuning Loop 4 13 9 10 11 Setting Loop Gains Ziegler and Nichols Tuning Approach 4 13 9 10 12 Sample PID Call 2 pede cr e Hh eee he 4 13 APPENDIX A INSTRUCTION TIMING A Y APPENDIX B INTERPRETING FAULTS USING ALSPA P8 25 35 05 SOFTWARE B f 1 FAULT TABLE e exe oe ty vedo ace B 1 1 Long Short Indicator De ua ei x AG ee acia PR a ets B 47 1 2 2r rae oan wide ty 1 3 Meade eden B A LA Slot ME B f 1 5 Task 2 oe ete eee UH ede E E ates 1 6 PLC Fault Group 1 B J 1 7 Fault Action RIP EI RE ede wes B 1 8 Eror Code 1 9 Fault Ex
19. Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Example In the following example every time input 10012 transitions from OFF to ON up counter PRT_CNT counts up by 1 internal coil 7M0001 is energized whenever 100 parts have been counted Whenever 0001 is ON the accumulated count is reset to zero 10012 gt UPCTR M0001 CONST 00100 PRT 2 6 DNCTR The Down Counter DNCTR function is used to count down from a preset value The minimum preset value is zero the maximum present value is 32767 counts The minimum current value is 32768 When reset the current value of the counter is set to the preset value PV When the enable input transitions from OFF to ON the current value is decremented by one The output is ON whenever the current value is less than or equal to zero The current value of the DNCTR is retentive on power failure no automatic initialization occurs at power up enable Q reset R preset value PV address 3 words ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 19 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 2 6 1 Parameters Parameter Description address The DNCTR uses three consecutive words registers of R memory to store the following e Current value CV word 1 Preset value PV word 2 e Control word word 3 When you enter an DNCTR you must en
20. Block locking feature 2 31 EDITLOCK 2 3 VIEWLOCK 2 3 Block move function 4 63 BPOS 4 54 BSET 4 51 BTST 4 5 2 2r C CALL 4 91 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Index 7 Index Call function 4 9T CFG MM 2 23 Checksum calculation 2 1 Checksum failure program block 3 17 Clocks 2 2 elapsed time clock 2 2 time of day clock 2 Coil check feature 2 20 Coils 4 1 d continuation coil 4 7 negated coil 4 4 negated retentive coil 4 negative transition coil 4 positive transition coil 4 3 RESET coil 4 retentive coil 4 retentive RESET coil retentive SET coil 4 SET coil 4 31 COMMENT 4 107 Comment function 4 1047 COMMREQ 4 74 Communication request function 4 74 Communications failure during store Communications with the PLC 2 1T Configuration 4 F Configuration mismatch system 3 1F Constant sweep time exceeded 3 17 Constant sweep time mode 2 10 2 3 Constant sweep timer 2 3 Contacts 4 continuation contact 4 normally closed contact 4 normally open contact 4 Continuation coil 4 9 Continuation contact 4 1 Control functions 4 90 CALL COMMENT 1049 DOIO 4 9 enhanced CPUs 4 9 END 4 9 ENDMCR 106 IO for the model 331 and 341 Index 8 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Instruction timing
21. Configuring the CPU Module in the ALS 52201 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs User s Manual for information on how to set that parameter Page 2 12 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 System Operation The operation of the Key Switch has the same safeguards and checks before the PLC goes to RUN mode just like the existing transition to RUN mode i e the PLC will not go to RUN mode via Key Switch input when the PLC is in STOP FAULT mode However you can clear non fatal faults and put the PLC in RUN mode through the use of Key Switch If there are faults in the fault tables that are not fatal they do not cause the CPU to be placed in the STOP FAULT mode then the CPU will be placed in RUN mode the first time you turn the key from Stop to Run and the fault tables will NOT be cleared If there are faults in the fault table that are fatal CPU in STOP FAULT mode then the first transition of the Key Switch from the STOP position to the RUN position will cause the CPU RUN light to begin to flash at 2 Hz rate and a 5 second timer will begin The flashing RUN light is an indication that there are fatal fault s in the fault tables In which case the CPU will NOT be placed in the RUN state even though the Key Switch is in RUN position 1 6 2 Clearing the Fault Table with the Key Switch If you turn the key from the RUN to STOP and back to
22. INT 380201 I1 2800201 CONST 12 00001 5 0002 I II SUB INT 580201 I1 0 1 5800201 CONST I2 00001 4 22 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 3 MATH FUNCTIONS This paragraph describes the math functions of the Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instru ction Set Abbreviation Function Description Page ADD Addition Add two numbers 4 23 SUB Subtraction Subtract one number from another 4 23 MUL Multiplication Multiply two numbers 4 23 DIV Division Divide one number by another yielding a quotient 4 23 MOD Modulo Division Divide one number by another yielding a remainder 27 SQRT Square Root Find the square root of an integer or real value 129 SIN COS TAN Trigonometric Functions Perform the appropriate function on the real value in input IN 1 99 ASIN ACOS ATAN LOG LN Logarithmic Exponential Perform the appropriate function on the real value in input IN 1T EXP EXPT Functions RAD DEG Radian Conversion Perform the appropriate function on the real value in input IN 17 34 Trigonometric Functions Logarithmic Exponential Functions and Radian Conversion functions are only available on the model 352 CPU Division and modulo divis
23. 1437 system references 3 97 system registers 2 system status 2 197 23 1 Vertical link 4 9 VIEWLOCK 2 31 Index 16 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Index W WORD 2 26 4 87 Watchdog timer 2 30 Window 2 7 X programmer communications window 2 97 system communications window 2 107 XOR 4 44 ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Index 17
24. 15 Contents Page 16 8 CONVERSION FUNCTIONS 4 8 8 1 N es ade nabs eas 4 8 8 1 1 d oret RR Gen 4 8 8 1 2 Valid Memory Types enacted Rte po eoe 4 8 8 2 d REAL 4 8 821 Parameters 3 voe ne eiie er ee eae 4 8 8 2 93 Valid Memory HR ee eee gob ERU C eS Ere 4 8 8 3 gt DINT REAL biased Dc 4 8 Parametetszc eiit e ueteres 4 8 8 3 2 Valid Memory Types ee e Ree 4 8 8 4 gt REAL INT DINT BCD 4 WORD 4 8 841 Parameters ssi od eee dade din wk ee RR RR eS E ER SEU Y ex 4 8 842 Valid Memory Types m Rot con pago ci ten 4 8 8 5 gt WORD REAL SIUE 4 8 56 5 1 Parametetse2 22s ER Ree PCR are iR ete oe ener emm pe be 4 8 8 2 Valid Memory oscine ie eA ER OCC NER 4 8 8 6 TRUN INT DI NT 4 8 8 6 1 9 eoi aS PISO SOR ehe ra 4 8 T 8 6 2 Valid Memory Types ede RP Xe rei Redi da S Robe kc mier rg 4 8 T 9 CONTROL FUNCTIONS iii nez Ese rer tes aac 4 90
25. CADLa issu me REESE UE EIU REV a dese e aie 4 917 Do DOR e 4 93 92 1 Parameters ERR M REC Cb ed by etie a 4 9 9 2 2 Valid Memory is oorr cereo Rd cd SCR ome b Ce he eed 4 9 9 2 3 Enhanced DO I O Function for the 331 and Higher CPUs 4 9 9 3 END ee acd Oe bay hg CD EE We ea e Aha eG 4 9 WE 6 MINNIE ee ns 4 9 9 5 ENDMCR ce RU VR E RE 4 10 DE JUME peace a a 4 10 97 LABEL Sh te eee WERE cee ae 4 10 9 5 COMMENT ao Raton ROS a ea e Ho A SHOE races 4 10 OG 4 10 9 91 Parametets s sore RR RI RR E Rer EA deere au 4 10 9 9 2 Valid Memory Types 4 rh pte Phe ene ehe 4 10 9 9 3 6 Change Read Number of Words to Checksum 4 10 9 9 3 1 To Read the Current Word 4 10 9 9 3 2 New Word Count 4 10 CHAPTER 6 ALSPA 8 25 35 05 INSTRUCTION SET 4 108 9 9 4 SVCREQ7 Change Read Time of Day Clock 4 10 9 9 4 1 Parameter Block Contents
26. R0500 PARM 10349 310347 1 1 510348 CONST FNC 00014 380550 PARM Page 4 114 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 9 7 SVCREQ 15 Read Last Logged Fault Table Entry Use SVCREQ function 15 in order to read the last entry logged in either the PLC fault table or the I O fault table The SVCREQ output is set ON unless some number other than 0 or 1 is entered as the requested operation see below or the fault table is empty For additional information on fault table entries refer to chapter 3 Fault Explanations and Correction For this function the parameter block has a length of 22 words The input parameter block has this format 0 Read PLC fault table address 1 Read I O fault table The format for the output parameter block depends on whether the function reads data from the PLC fault table or the I O fault table PLC Fault Table Output Format I O Fault Table Output Format Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte SEY longshot address 1 longshot spare address 2 referenceaddress 7 PLC fault address address 3 address 4 fault address fault group and action address 5 errorcode address 6 faultgroupandaction address 7 Taultcate
27. eM 5 WORD 0001 IN LEN 100006 POS 540001 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual 4 55 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 5 9 MSKCMP WORD DWORD The Masked Compare MSKCMP function available for Release 4 41 or later CPUs is used to compare the contents of two separate bit strings with the ability to mask selected bits The length of the bit strings to be compared is specified by the LEN parameter where the value of LEN specifies the number of 16 bit words for the MSKCMPW function and 32 bit words for the MSKCMPD function When the logic controlling the enable input to the function passes power flow to the enable EN input the function begins comparing the bits in the first string with the corresponding bits in the second string Comparison continues until a miscompare is found or until the end of the string is reached The BIT input is used to store the bit number where the next comparison should start where a indicates the first bit in the string The BN output is used to store the bit number where the last comparison occurred where 1 indicates the first bit in the string Using the same reference for BIT and BN causes the compare to start at the next bit position after a miscompare or if all bits compared successfully upon the next invocation of the function block the compare starts at the beginning If y
28. kr bee RENE Wha BEES Rag 4 1 241 Patamelters ose tta eh ER OU ete 4 1 2 44 3 Valid Memory Types eee ee e o PRA LR ARR KR o R RR e Rc e c Rr 4 1 2 5 MUPCTR 13226 aee Re niea E 2 5 1 ParameletS PRIME Ede bebe ee Ee E PIS ESO 4 1 29 2 Valid Memory Types iusso Sr ERR X 4 1 2 0 DNCTR whee en d ddr uude a 2 0 1 ecce dot audi eter b tee eet 4 2 2 6 4 Valid Memory sonici is aris aH 3 MATH FUNCTIONS crt CS REOR 4 217 3 1 Standard Math Functions ADD SUB MUL DIV 4 237 Parameters dae y ter Joh e eR p Pac ee eb dot E MR Ue 4 2 3 1 2 Memory ec enhn RU RR CARERE Roe Op Vah Ree RR e hoe ea 4 2 3 1 3 Math Functions and Data Types 4 2 32 MOD INT DINT E 3 2 Parameters s iae tne RR sce dea eee ok gates 4 2 3 2 2 Walid Memory 1 nete mo edo Pd Roe ego e 4 2 3 3 SQRT INT DINT i nen isc tan na neus E 3 3 1 RISE RP ER MN
29. 4 Retentive RESET coil 4 0 Retentive SET coil 4 Retentiveness of data 2 20 ROL 4 49 ROR 4 47 RAD 4 317 Radian conversion function 4 34 RANGE 4 317 Range function 4 3T REAL Rotate left function 4 41 Rotate right function 4 49 S Index 14 convert to REAL 4 8 Data type structure 2 Using floating point numbers E T Using Real numbers E r Register Reference system registers 2 137 Register references 2 137 analog inputs 2 1 analog outputs 2 Relational functions 4 31 EQ 4 3 GE 4 3 4 3 4 3 DI 4 3 4 RANGE 2 37 Relay functions 4 1 coils 445 contacts t continuation coil 4 continuation contact 4 horizontal and vertical links negated 4 negated retentive coil 4 negative transition coil 4 normally closed contact 4 normally open contact 4 positive transition coil H Alspa 80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Scan Time Contributions for 351 CPUs 2 0 Scan time contributions for module types 2 10 Scan input 2 9 Scan output 2 3 Search array move function 4 76 Search equal function 4 707 Search greater than function Search greater than or equal function 4 17 Search less than function 4 797 Search less than or equal function 4 77 Search not equal function 4 77 Security system 2 3 locking unlocking subroutines 2 37
30. Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 125 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Register Parameter Low Bit Units Range of Values oRef 0023 Clock N A set and Ref 0024 maintained by Non configurable 0025 time last executed the PLC JRef 0026 Y Remainder Storage N A set and maintained by the Non configurable PLC Ref 0027 Lower Range for SP PV PV Counts 32000 to 32000 gt Ref 28 for display 0028 Upper Range for SP PV PV Counts 32000 to 32000 lt Ref 27 for display JRef 0029 Reserved for internal use N A Non configurable JRef 0034 JRef 0035 Reserved for external use N A Non configurable JRef 0039 The RefArray array must be R registers on the 80 35 PLC Note that every PID block call must use a different 40 word array even if all 13 user parameters are the same because other words in the array are used for internal PID data storage Make sure the array does not extend beyond the end of memory To configure the user parameters select the PID function and press F10 to zoom in to a screen displaying User Parameters then use arrow keys to select fields and type in desired values You can use 0 for most default values except the CV Upper Clamp which must be greater than the CV Lower Clamp for the PID block to operate Note that the PID block does not pass power if there is an error in User Parameters so monitor with a temporary coil w
31. amp SRCHGE amp SRCHLT amp SRCHLE as a separator For example amp ADD INT Page D 4 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Key Functions Alspa P8 Instruction Mnemonics Help ALT I Instruction Type Modifier Used with Signed Integer I Math Relational Data Move amp Table Double Precision Integer _DI Math Relational amp Table Bit _BI Data Move amp Table Byte BY Table Word _W Operation Data Move amp Table BCD4 _BCD4 Conversion Tenths of Seconds TEN Timers Hundredths of Seconds HUN Timers ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 5 Key Functions Page D 6 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Appendix Using Floating Point Numbers There a few considerations you need to understand when using floating point numbers The first section discusses these general considerations Refer to page H 5 and following for instructions on entering and displaying floating point numbers 1 FLOATING POINT NUMBERS Alspa P8 software provides the ability to edit display store and retrieve numbers with real values Some functions operate on floating point numbers However in order to use floating point numbers with Alspa P8 35 25 05 software you must have a 352 CPU Floating point numbers are represented in decimal scientific
32. 0 160 0 462 2 channel analog output 0 161 0 138 0 182 0 428 0 099 0 148 0 392 High Speed Counter 2 070 2 190 2 868 5 587 1 580 2 175 4 897 APM 1 2 330 2 460 3 175 6 647 1 750 2 506 5 899 no devices 0 041 0 054 0 063 0 128 0 038 0 048 0 085 NCM 8 x 64 11 420 11 570 13 247 21 288 9 536 10 648 19 485 devices no devices 0 887 0 967 1 164 1 920 0 666 0 901 1 626 NCM 32 x 64 point 4 120 6 250 8 529 21 352 5 043 7 146 20 052 devices not configured or N A 3 350 N A N A 1 684 N A N A PCM 311 T task read 128 R as N A 4 900 N A N A 2 052 N A N A fast as possible ADC 311 N A 3 340 N A N A 1 678 N A N A 16 channel analog input 1 370 1 450 1 937 4 186 1 092 1 570 3 796 current or voltage Information additional to what is provided on the previous page for the Micro PLC is included in the ALS 52119 Alspa C80 05 Micro PLC User s Manual and will be included in this table in the manual that will accompany next release of the Alspa 8 25 35 05 software ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 5 System Operation Table 2 3 I O Scan Time Contribution for Alspa C80 35 351 352 Module in milliseconds CPU 351 352 Module Type Main Expansion Remote Rack Rack Rack 8 point discrete input 0 030 0 055 0 026 16 point discr
33. 1 place a 1 in the corresponding location in output string Q OR Logical OR If a bit in bit string I1 and or the corresponding bit in bit string I2 are 4 41 both 1 place a 1 in the corresponding location in output string Q XOR Logical exclusive Ifa bitin bit string and the corresponding bit in string I2 are different 1 59 OR place a 1 in the corresponding location in the output bit string NOT Logical invert Set the state of each bit in output bit string Q to the opposite state of the 146 corresponding bit in bit string I1 SHL Shift Left Shift all the bits in a word or string of words to the left by a specified ee number of places SHR Shift Right Shift all the bits in a word or string of words to the right by a specified T number of places ROL Rotate Left Rotate all the bits in a string a specified number of places to the left Rotate Right Rotate all the bits in a string a specified number of places to the right T4 BTST Bit Test Test a bit within a bit string to determine whether that bit is currently Ctr lor0 BSET Bit Set Set a bit in a bit string to 1 BCLR Bit Clear Clear a bit within a string by setting that bit to 0 52 BPOS Bit Position Locate a bit set to 1 in a bit string 2 5 MSKCMP Masked Compare Compare the contents of two separate bit strings with the ability to mask 1 6 selected bits available for Release 4 5 or higher CPUs 51 ANDandOR WORD Each scan that power is rec
34. 2 4 ALS 52102 Index Instruction mnemonics Instruction set 4 bit operation functions 4 47 control functions 4 9 conversion functions 4 data move functions 4 6 math functions 4 ie relational functions 31 relay functions 4 table functions 4 timers and counters Instructions programming 4 bit operation functions 4 441 control functions 4 9 conversion functions 4 data move functions 4 6 instruction mnemonics C math functions relational functions 31 relay functions 4 table functions timers and counters INT 2 20 4 83 Internal failures 3 7 Internal references discrete 2 19 Inverse cosine function 4 307 Inverse sine function 4 30 Inverse tangent function 4 30 IO 2 23 IO FULL 2 27 IO_PRES 2 23 J JUMP 4 10 Jump instruction 4 10T K Key switch on 351 and 352 CPUs 2 17 L LABEL 4 1 037 Label instruction 4 1037 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Index 11 Index LE 4 33 Less than function 4 31 Less than or equal function 4 31 Levels privilege 2 3 change requests oe Links horizontal and vertical 4 1 LN 4 37 Locking unlocking subroutines 2 37 LOG 4 37 Logarithmic functions 4 37 base 10 logarithm 4 3 natural logarithm 4 3 Logic program checksum calculation 2 1 Logic solution 2 Logical AND fun
35. 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Appendix Instruction Mnemonics In Program Display Edit mode you can quickly enter or search for programming instruction by typing the ampersand amp character followed by the instruction s mnemonic For some instructions you can also specify a reference address or nickname a label or a location reference address This appendix lists the mnemonics of the programming instructions for Alspa P8 25 35 05 programming software The complete mnemonic is shown in column 3 of this table and the shortest entry you can make for each instruction is listed in column 4 At any time during programming you can display a help screen with these mnemonics by pressing the ALT and I keys Function Mnemonic Group Instruction INT DINT BIT BYTE WORD Contacts Any Contact amp CON amp CON Normally Open amp NOCON amp NOCON Contact Normally Closed amp NCCON amp NCCON Contact Continuation amp CONC amp CONC Contact Coils Any Coil amp COI amp COI Normally Open amp NOCOI amp NOCOI Coil Negated Coil amp NCCOI amp NCCOI Positive amp PCOI amp PCOI Transition Coil Negative amp NCOI amp NCOI Transition Coil SET Coil amp SL amp SL RESET Coil amp RL amp RL Retentive SET amp SM amp SM Coil Retentive RESET amp RM amp RM Coil Retentive Coil amp NOM amp NOM Negated Retentive amp NCM amp NCM Coil Continuation Coil amp COILC amp COILC Li
36. 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 System Operation In addition to being called from the program subroutine blocks can also be called by other subroutine blocks A subroutine block may even call itself SUBROUTINE 2 SUBROUTINE 3 There is no limit to the number of levels of calls to subroutine blocks that Alspa P8 software will allow However the PLC will only allow eight nested calls before an Application Stack Overflow fault is logged and the PLC transitions to STOP FAULT mode The call level nesting counts the program as level 1 SUBROUTINE 4 2 1 2 How Subroutine Blocks are Called A subroutine block executes when called from the program logic in the program or from another block 510004 TO001 1 10006 1 1 CALL ASTRO SUBROUTINE 510003 510010 500010 1 1 This example shows the subroutine CALL instruction as it will appear in the calling block By positioning the cursor within the instruction you can press F10 to zoom into the subroutine ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 17 System Operation 2 1 3 Periodic Subroutines Version 4 20 or later of the 340 and higher CPUs support periodic subroutines see chapter 3 Subroutine Blocks of the ALS 52201 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Progr
37. 9 10 3 to solve the PID algorithm at the desired time interval All parameters are 16 bit integer words for compatibility with 16 bit analog process variables This allows AI memory to be used for input Process Variables to be used for output Control Variables The example shown below includes typical inputs 500007 enable Power flow out if OK IND set point R00010 AQ0001 Control Variable 21000 25000 process variable AI0001 20950 M00001 UP DN R00100 RefArray is 40 R words reference array address As the input Set Point and Process Variable and output Control Variable terms are used so frequently they will be abbreviated as SP PV and CV As scaled 16 integer numbers many parameters must be defined in either PV counts or units or CV counts or units For example the SP input must be scaled over the same range as PV as the PID block calculates the error by subtracting these two inputs The PV and CV Counts may be 32000 or 0 to 32000 matching analog scaling or from 0 to 10000 to display variables as 0 0096 to 100 0096 The PV and CV Counts do not have to have the same scaling in which case there will be scale factors included in the PID gains The PID will not execute more often than once every 10 milliseconds This could change your desired results if you set it up to execute every sweep and the sweep is under 10 milliseconds In such a case the PID fu
38. Any Coil search ee 20 20x M M lt gt Links Timers On Delay Timer Elapsed Timer Off Delay Timer Counters Up Counter Down Counter Arithmetic Subtract Multiply Divide Modulo Divide Square Root Relational Equal Not Equal Greater Than Greater Than Equal Less Than Less Than Equal Bit Operation AND OR Exclusive OR Invert NOT Instructions with a type modifier listed in the following table may have the type modifier appended with and underscore _ Alspa P8 Instruction Mnemonics Help ALT I Mnemonic NOCON NCOI SL PEEBEERERBESEERSE Q Instructions Mnemonic Any Contact search amp CON Bit Operation d Shift Left Shift Right Rotate Left Rotate Right Test a Bit Set a bit to 1 Set a bit to 0 Locate a bit set to 1 Data Move Move Block Move Block Clear Shift Register BitSequencer Comm Request Table Search for Array Move Equal Not Equal Greater Than Greater Than Equal Less Than Less Than Equal Conversion Convert to Integer Convert to BCD 4 Control Call PID IND Algorithm PID ISA Algorithm End Comment Service Request Non nested MCR End non nested MCR Nested MCR End nested MCR JUMP JUMPN LABEL LABELN amp SRCHN amp SRCHGT
39. Description Error Code Description 1 Corrupted User RAM on Power Up The PLC operating software operating software generates this error when it detects corrupted user RAM on power up 1 Reload the configuration file user program and references if 2 Replace the battery on the PLC CPU 3 Replace the expansion memory board on the PLC CPU 4 Replace the PLC CPU 2 Illegal Boolean OpCode Detected The PLC operating software operating software generates this error when it detects a bad instruction in the user program 1 Restore the user program and references if any 2 Replace the expansion memory board on the PLC CPU 3 Replace the PLC CPU 2 12 Password Access Failure The Fault Group Password Access Failure occurs when the PLC CPU receives a request to change to a new privilege level and the password included with the request is not valid for that level The fault action for this group is Informational Correction Retry the request with the correct password Page 3 14 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Fault Explanations and Correction 2 13 PLC CPU System Software Failure Faults in the Fault Group PLC CPU System Software Failure are generated by the operating software of the Alspa 80 35 80 25 or C80 05 PLC CPU They occur at many different points of system operation When a Fatal fault occurs the PLC CPU immedia
40. Execution time is dependent upon the length of the program Execution and the type of instructions used in the program Instruction execution times are listed in Appendig 7 Data Output Output data is sent to output and option 0 1656 Sef Fable 2 2 for scan time contributions modules Service External Service requests from HHP 1 93 6 526 4 426 4 524 2 476 0 334 Devices programming devices and intelligent modules are P8 0 380 3 536 2 383 2 454 1 248 0 517 1 processed PCM 2 N A N A N A 3337 1943 0482 Reconfiguration Slots with faulted modules and empty N A N A 0 458 0 639 0 463 0 319 slots are monitored Diagnostics Verify user program integrity time N A 0 083 0 050 0 048 0 031 0 010 contribution is the time required per word checksummed each sweep l The scan time contribution of external device service is dependent upon the mode of the communications window in which the service is processed If the window mode is LIMITED a maximum of 6 ms will be spent during that window If the window mode is RUN TO COMPLETION maximum of 50 ms can be spent in that window depending upon the number of requests which are presented simultaneously 2 These measurements were taken with the PCM physically present but not configured and with no application task running on the PCM 3 The number of words checksummed each sweep be changed with the SVCREQ function block These
41. G memory is sent to the NCM The Alspa C80 25 and Micro output scans include discrete outputs only During the output scan all Model 35 output modules are scanned in ascending reference address order If the CPU is in the STOP mode and the CPU is configured to not scan I O during STOP mode the output scan is skipped The output scan is completed when all output data has been sent to all Model 35 output modules Page 2 8 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 System Operation 1 1 7 Logic Program Checksum Calculation A checksum calculation is performed on the user program at the end of every sweep Since it would take too long to calculate the checksum of the entire program you can specify the number of words from 0 to 32 to be checksumed on the CPU detail screen Refer to chapter 10 in the ALS 52201 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa C80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs User s Manual If the calculated checksum does not match the reference checksum the program checksum failure exception flag is raised This causes a fault entry to be inserted into the PLC fault table and the PLC mode to be changed to STOP If the checksum calculation fails the programmer communications window is not affected 1 2 Programmer Communications Window This part of the sweep is dedicated to communicating with the programmer If there is a programmer attached the CPU executes the programmer communicatio
42. IN ok For the EXPT function input IN is replaced by input parameters 12 Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Example In the following example the value of AIO01 is raised to the power of 2 5 and the result is placed in R0001 EXPT REAL 001 11 Q RO001 CONST 12 2 50000 00 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual 4 33 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 3 6 Radian Conversion RAD DEG When the function receives power flow the appropriate conversion TO DEG or DEG TO RAD i e Radian to Degree or vice versa is performed on the real value in input IN and the result is placed in output Q The ok output will receive power flow unless IN is NaN Not a Number p XA DEG input parameter IN IN output parameter 0 3 6 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed IN IN contains the real value to be operated on ok The ok output is energized when the function is performed without overflow unless IN is NaN Q Output Q contains the converted value of IN The Radian conversion functions are only available on the 352 CPU 3 6 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow I Q T S G
43. T00001 AQ002 R00113 R00113 R00002 ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set The block can be switched to Manual mode with M1 so that the Manual Command R113 can be adjusted Bits or M5 can be used to increase or decrease R113 and the PID CV and integrator by 1 every 100 MSec solution For faster manual operation bits M2 and M3 can be used to add or subtract the value in R2 to from 113 every PLC sweep The 9011 output is on when the PID is OK ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 137 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Page 4 138 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Appendix Instruction Timing A The Alspa 80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs support many different functions and function blocks This appendix contains tables showing the memory size in bytes and the execution time in microseconds for each function Memory size is the number of bytes required by the function in a ladder diagram application program Two execution times are shown for each function Execution Time Description Enabled Time required to execute the function or function block when power flows into and out of the function Typically best case times are when the data used by the block is contained in user RAM word oriented memory and not in the the ISCP cache memory discrete memory Disable
44. The PLC operating software generates these errors when certain PLC operating software problems occur These should not occur in a production system Correction 1 Display the PLC fault table on the programmer Contact Cegelec PLC Field Service giving them all the information contained in the fault entry 2 Perform the corrections for corrupted memory Error Code 27 to 4E Name PLC Operating Software Error Description The PLC operating software generates these errors when certain PLC operating software problems occur These errors should not occur in a production system Correction Display the PLC fault table on the programmer Contact Cegelec PLC Field Service giving them all the information contained in the fault entry Error Code 4F Name Communications Failed Description The PLC operating software service request processor generates this error when it attempts to comply with a request that requires backplane communications and receives arejected response Correction 1 Check the bus for abnormal activity 2 Replace the intelligent option module to which the request was directed Error Code 50 51 53 Name System Memory Errors Description The PLC operating software generates these errors when its requestforablockofsystem memory is denied by the memory manager because no memory is available or contains errors Correction 1 Displaythe PLC faulttable on the programmer Contact Cegelec PLC Field Service giving t
45. The following table enables you to quickly find a particular I O fault explanation in this section Each entry is listed as it appears on the programmer screen Page 3 18 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Fault Explanations and Correction 3 1 Loss of I O Module The Fault Category Loss of I O Module applies to Model 35 discrete and analog I O modules There are no fault types or fault descriptions associated with this category The fault action is Diagnostic Description Correction The PLC operating software generates this error when it detects that a Model 35 I O module is no longer responding to commands from the PLC CPU or when the configuration file indicates an I O module is to occupy a slot and no module exists in the slot 1 Replace the module 2 Correct the configuration file 3 Display the PLC fault table on the programmer Contact Cegelec PLC Field Service giving them all the information contained in the fault entry 3 2 Addition of Module The Fault Category Addition of I O Module applies to Model 35 discrete and analog I O modules There are no fault types or fault descriptions associated with this category The fault action is Diagnostic Description Correction Description Correction The PLC operating software generates this error when it detects a Model 35 I O module ina slot The PLC operating software generates this error wh
46. These tables can be displayed on the PLC Fault Table and I O Fault Table screens in Alspa P8 25 35 05 software using the control and status functions 3 ALSPA 80 25 80 35 C80 05 INSTRUCTION SET Programming consists of creating an application program for a PLC Because Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 Micro PLCs have a common instruction set they can all be programmed using the same software Chapter of this manual describes the instruction set used to create ladder logic programs for the Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 Micro PLCs If the Alspa 8 25 35 05 programming software is not yet installed please refer to the ALS 52201 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa C80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs User s Manual for instructions The user s manual explains how to create transfer edit and print programs Configuration is the process of assigning logical addresses as well as other characteristics to the hardware modules in the system It may be done either before or after programming using the configuration software which is part of Alspa 8 25 35 05 software however it is recommended that configuration be done first If that has not been done you should refer to the ALS 52201 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs User s Manual to decide whether it is best to begin programming at this time 3 1 Contacts Coils and Links The most basic elements of a progra
47. enabling logic is used to control power flow to a function block otherwise the function block executes unconditionally each CPU sweep Enabling logic Power flow into the function Power flow out of the function 510001 J 00001 I MUL_ A 580123 I1 0 580124 Displays state of reference CONST 12 00002 INT Power flows out of the function block on the upper right It may be passed to other program logic or to a coil optional Function blocks pass power when they execute successfully Each function s description in this book explains the conditions under which it passes power flow to the right Function blocks cannot be tied directly to the left power rail You can use S7 the ALL_ON always on bit with a normally open contact tied to the power rail to call a function every sweep Page 2 26 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 System Operation 3 POWER UP AND POWER DOWN SEQUENCES There two possible power up sequences in the Alspa C80 35 PLC a cold power up and a warm power up The CPU normally uses the cold power up sequence However in a Model 331 or higher PLC system if the time that elapses between power down and the next power up is less than five seconds the warm power up sequence is used 3 1 Power Up A cold power up consists of the following sequence of events A w
48. nested ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 103 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 8 COMMENT Use the COMMENT function to enter a comment rung explanation in the program A comment can have up to 2048 characters of text It is represented in the ladder logic like this COMMENT The text can be read or edited by moving the cursor to COMMENT after accepting the rung and selecting Zoom F10 Comment text can also be printed Longer text can be included in printouts using an annotation text file as described below 1 Create the comment a Enter text to the point where the text from the other file should begin b Move the cursor to the beginning of a new line and enter or i the drive followed by a colon the subdirectory or folder and the file name as shown in this example d text commnt1 The drive designation is not necessary if the file is located on the same drive as the program folder c Continue editing the program or exit to MS DOS After exiting the programmer create a text file using any MS DOS compatible software package Give the file the file name entered in the comment and place it on the drive specified in the comment 9 9 SVCREQ Use the Service Request SVCREQ function to request one of the following special PLC services Table 4 3 Service Request Functions Function Description 6 Change Read Checksum
49. ox INT constant value IN1 Q output parameter constant value 2 constant value IN3 constant value IN4 constant value IN5 constant value IN6 constant value IN7 6 2 1 Parameters Parameter enable IN1 IN7 ok Q INI to IN7 contain seven constant values Description When the function is enabled the block move is performed The ok output is energized whenever the function is enabled Output Q contains the first integer of the moved array is moved to Q ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 63 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 6 2 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow 961 Q 905 G WAI WAQ const enable IN1 IN7 Note For REAL data the only valid types are R 6 AI and AQ Valid reference for place where power may flow through the function o Won og Valid reference for WORD data only not valid for INT or REAL T PSA 96SB SC only 96S cannot be used The 352 CPU is the only C80 35 Floating Point CPU at this time and therefore the only one capable of REAL Example In the following example when the enabling input represented by the nickname FST SCN is ON the BLKMOV function copies the seven input constants into memory locations R0010 to 6R0016 FST S
50. 1 10 Square Root DINT 76 0 13 Square Root REAL 352 only 35 0 11 Trigonometric SIN REAL 352 only 32 0 11 COS REAL 352 only 29 0 11 TAN REAL 352 only 32 1 11 ASIN REAL 352 only 45 0 11 ACOS REAL 352 only 63 0 11 ATAN REAL 352 only 33 1 11 Logarithmic LOG REAL 352 only 32 0 11 LN REAL 352 only 32 0 11 EXP 352 only 42 0 11 EXPT 352 only 54 1 17 Radian Conversion Convert RAD to DEG 352 only 32 1 11 Convert DEG to RAD 352 only 32 0 11 ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page A 5 Instruction Timing Table A 1 Instruction Timing Continued Function Enabled Disabled Increment Group Function 351 352 351 352 351 352 Size Relational Equal INT 1 0 10 Equal DINT 2 0 16 Equal REAL 352 only 33 0 14 Not Equal INT 1 0 10 Not Equal DINT 1 0 16 Not Equal REAL 352 only 31 0 14 Greater Than INT 0 10 Greater Than DINT 1 0 16 Greater Than REAL 352 only 32 0 14 Greater Than Equal INT 1 0 10 Greater Than Equal DINT 1 0 10 Greater Than Equal REAL 352 only 36 1 14 Less Than INT 1 0 10 Less Than DINT 1 0 16 Less Than REAL 352 only 36 1 14 Less Than Equal INT 1 0 10 Less Than Equal DINT 3 0 16 Less Than Equal REAL 352 only 37 0 14 Range INT 2 1 13 Range DINT 2 1 22 Range WORD 1 0 13 Bit Logical AND 2 0 13 Operatio
51. 52605 Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual ALS 52607 Axis Positioning Module for Alspa 80 35 PLC Follower Mode User s Manual GFK 04668 ALS Alspa 25 35 Important Product Information GFK 0521 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module Data Sheet Page 6 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Preface 3 MANUAL NUMBERS In some cases Alspa 8000 manuals may be issued with numbers that differ from the one given under Related Publications in the Preface of other manuals or in Important Product Information or data sheets The contents are similar The table below shows the correspondence between ALS and equivalent numbers for the manuals concerned ALS Number Other Number ALS Number Other Number ALS 52113 0600 ALS 52507 0074 ALS 52302 90486 2 ALS 52508 0868 ALS 52303 GFZ 0043 ALS 52514 0870 ALS 52404 0415 ALS 52515 1026 ALS 52405 GFK 0819 ALS 52523 GFK 1063 ALS 52503 GFK 0585 ALS 52603 4 WE WELCOME YOUR COMMENTS AND SUGGESTIONS Cegelec strives to produce quality technical documentation Please take the time to fill in and return the Reader s Comment page if you have any remarks or suggestions ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 7 Preface Page 8 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Reader s comments ALS 52102 A
52. 75 PLC The Alspa C80 25 PLC provides a cost effective platform for low I O count applications The primary objectives of the Alspa 80 25 PLC are provide a small PLC that is easy to use install upgrade and maintain To provide a cost effective family compatible PLC To provide easier system integration through standard communication hardware and protocols The Alspa 80 05 Micro PLC also provides a cost effective platform for lower count applications The primary objectives of the Micro PLC are the same as those for the Alspa C80 25 In addition the Micro PLC offers the following The Micro PLC has the CPU power supply inputs and outputs all built into one small device Most models also have a high speed counter Because the CPU power supply inputs and outputs are all built into one device it is very easy to configure 1 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE The software structure for the Alspa C80 35 PLC except 351 models and Alspa C80 25 PLC uses an architecture that manages memory and execution priority in the 80188 microprocessor Models 351 and 352 uses an 80386 EX microprocessor The Alspa 80 05 Micro PLC uses the H8 microprocessor This operation supports both program execution and basic housekeeping tasks such as diagnostic routines input output scanners and alarm processing The system software also contains routines to communicate with the programmer These routines provide for the upload
53. 8 2 INT BCD 4 REAL The Convert to Signed Integer function is used to output the integer equivalent of BCD 4 or REAL data The original data is not changed by this function The output data can be used directly as input for another program function Note The REAL data type is only available on 352 CPUs When the function receives power flow it performs the conversion making the result available via output Q The function always passes power flow when power is received unless the data is out of range enable ok TO INT value to be converted IN 0 output parameter 0 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 83 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 8 2 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the conversion is performed IN IN contains a reference for the BCD 4 REAL or Constant value to be converted to integer ok The ok output is energized whenever enable is energized unless the data is out of range or NaN Not a Number Q Output Q contains the integer form of the original value in IN 8 2 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow 1 Q eT 905 G WAI WAQ const enable IN e e e e e e e e e ok Q e e e e Note For REAL data the only valid types are AI and AQ e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function
54. ALS 52119 Alspa 80 05 Micro PLC User s Manual Table 2 11 Micro PLC Models Catalog Number Description I O Points CE693UDR001 CPU Power Supply and I O all one unit 8 In 6 Out Micro 14 pt DC In Relay Out AC Power Supply CE693UDR002 CPU Power Supply and I O all one unit 8 In 6 Out Micro 14 pt DC In Relay Out DC Power Supply CE693UAA003 CPU Power Supply and I O all one unit 8 In 6 Out 14 pt AC In AC Out AC Power Supply CE693UAA007 CPU Power Supply and I O all one unit 28 In 12 Out 28 pt AC In AC Out AC Power Supply CE693UDD005 CPU Power Supply and I O all one unit 28 In 12 Out Micro 28 pt DC In Relay Out AC Power Supply 1 DC out 11 relay Out Page 2 38 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Chapter Fault Explanations and Correction 3 This chapter 15 an aid to troubleshooting the Alspa 80 35 Alspa 80 25 and Micro PLCs It explains the fault descriptions which appear in the PLC fault table and the fault categories which appear in the I O fault table Each fault explanation in this chapter lists the fault description for the PLC fault table or the fault category for the fault table Find the fault description or fault category corresponding to the entry on the applicable fault table displayed on your programmer screen Beneath it is a description of the cause of the fault along with inst
55. Alspa 80 05 Micro PLC This includes a discussion of the PLC sweep sequences the power up and power down sequences clocks and timers security I O and fault handling It also includes general information for a basic understanding of programming ladder logic Chapter 3 Fault Explanations and Correction provides troubleshooting information for an Alspa 80 35 80 25 or C80 05 PLC It explains fault descriptions in the PLC fault table and fault categories in the I O fault table Chapte Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set describes programming instructions available for the Alspa 80 35 PLC Alspa C80 25 PLC and Alspa 80 05 Micro PLC The information in this chapter is arranged as sections that correspond to the main program function groups Appendix A Instruction Timing lists the memory size in bytes and execution time in microseconds for each programming instruction Memory size is the number of bytes required by the function in a ladder diagram application program Appendix B Interpreting Fault Tables describes how to interpret the message structure format when reading the fault tables using Alspa P8 25 35 05 software Appendix Instruction Mnemonics lists mnemonics that can be typed to display programming instructions while searching through or editing a program Appendir D Key Functions lists the special keyboard assignments used for the Alspa P8 25 35 05 software ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80
56. CPU A rF 4 10 4 1 4 9 PID SVCREQ 4 1047 Conversion functions 4 877 BCD 4 4 8 DINT 4 837 INT 4 8 REAL 4 TRUN 4 8 WORD 4 Convert to BCD 4 function 4 837 Convert to double precision signed integer function 4 837 Convert to Real function 4 80 Convert to signed integer function 4 837 Convert to Word function 4 817 Corrupted memory 3 1 Corrupted user program on power up 3 COS 4 3 Cosine function 4 3 Counters 4 DNCTR 4 function block data 4 7 UPCTR 4 14 CPU sweep 2 T CTRL keys D rF CTRL F B B CTRL F to display hexadecimal fault information 3 17 D Data move functions 4 607 4 6 BLKCLR 4 4 6 4 t MOVE 4 6 SHFR 4 6 Data retentiveness 2 2 Data types 2 21 BCD 4 2 21 2 27 ALS 52102 2 2 DINT 2 2 o INT 2 2 REAL 2 WORD 2 Defaults conditions for model 35 output modules 2 597 DEG 4 34 1 Diagnostic data 2 37 Diagnostic faults addition of I O module 3 19 application fault 3 1 constant sweep time exceeded 3 4 loss of I O module 3 1 loss of or missing option module 3 107 low battery signal 3 1 reset of addition of or extra option module 3 10 DINT 2 20 4 81 Discrete references 2 197 discrete inputs 2 1 discrete internal 2 discrete outputs 2 1 di
57. Example In the following example whenever input 9610002 is set the BCD 4 value in PARTS is converted to a signed integer and passed to the ADD function where it is added to the signed integer value represented by the reference RUNNING The sum is output by the ADD function to the reference TOTAL 10002 IBCDA ADD TO INT INT PARTS IN 580001 580001 11 TOTAL RUNNING 12 4 84 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 8 3 gt DINT REAL The Convert to Double Precision Signed Integer function is used to output the double precision signed integer equivalent of real data The original data is not changed by this function The output data can be used directly as input for another program function When the function receives power flow it performs the conversion making the result available via output Q The function always passes power flow when power is received unless the real value is out of range DINT value to be converted IN 0 output parameter 0 8 3 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the conversion is performed IN In contains a reference for the value to be converted to double precision integer ok The ok output is energized whenever enable is energized unless the real
58. Global data is implemented by N80 Communications Modules transmitting data at I O reference addresses based on their serial bus addresses Each module can also read global data from up to seven other N80 Communications Modules 6 6 Model 25 I O Modules The following I O modules are available for the Alspa 80 25 PLC Each module is listed by catalog number number of I O points and a brief description The I O is integrated into a baseplate along with the power supply For the specifications and wiring information of each module refer to chapter 5 in the ALS 52 05 Alspa 80 25 PLC User s Manual Table 2 10 Model 25 I O Modules Catalog Number Description I O Points IC692MAA541 I O and Power Supply Base Module 16 In 12 Out 120 VAC In 120 VAC Out 120 VAC Power Supply IC692MDR541 I O and Power Supply Base Module 16 In 12 Out 24 VDC In Relay Out 120 VAC Power Supply IC692MDR741 I O and Power Supply Base Module 16 In 12 Out 24V DC In Relay Out 240 VAC Power Supply IC692CPU212 CPU Module Model CPU 212 Not Applicable ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 37 System Operation 6 7 Micro PLCs The following Alspa 80 05 Micro PLCs are available Each Micro is listed by catalog number number of I O points and a brief description The CPU power supply and I O are all part of one unit For the specifications and wiring information of each module refer to the
59. Module 6 1 MOVE INT WORD Use the MOVE function to copy data as individual bits from one location to another Because the data is copied in bit format the new location does not need to be the same data type as the original location The MOVE function has two input parameters and two output parameters When the function receives power flow it copies data from input parameter IN to output parameter Q as bits If data is moved from one location in discrete memory to another for example from I memory to T memory the transition information associated with the discrete memory elements is updated to indicate wheter or not the MOVE operation caused any discrete memory elements to change state Data at the input parameter does not change unless there is an overlap in the source destination For the BIT type there is another consideration If a BIT array specified on the Q parameter does not encompass all of the bits in a byte the transition bits associated with that byte which are not in the array will be cleared when the MOVE_BIT receives power flow Input IN can be either a reference for the data to be moved or a constant If a constant is specified then the constant value is placed in the location specified by the output reference For example if a constant value of 4 is specified for IN then 4 is placed in the memory location specified by Q If the length is greater than 1 and a constant is specified then the consta
60. PLC 1 1 2 Example of Sweep Time Calculation An example of the calculations for determining the sweep time for an Alspa C80 35 model 331 PLC are shown in the following table The modules and instructions used for these calculations are listed below Input modules five 16 Model 35 input modules Output modules four 16 point Model 35 output modules Programming instructions A 1200 step program consisting of 700 boolean instructions LD AND OR etc 300 output coils OUT OUTM etc and 200 math functions ADD SUB etc Table 2 4 Example Sweep Time Calculation for an Alspa C80 35 Model 331 PLC Time Contribution Sweep wo w w Component Calculation Programmer HHP P8 Housekeeping 0 705 ms 0 705 ms 0 705 ms 0 705 ms Data Input 0 055 x 52 0 275 ms 0 275 ms 0 275 ms 0 275 ms Program 700 x 0 4 us 300 x 0 5 us 200 x 51 2 us 10 7 ms 10 7 ms 10 7 ms 10 7 ms Execution Data Output 0 061 x 4 0 244 ms 0 244 ms 0 244 ms 0 244 ms Programmer 0 4 ms programmer time 0 6 ms 0 ms 4 524 ms 2 454 ms Service Non None in this example 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms Programmer Service Reconfiguration 0 639 ms 0 639 ms 0 639 ms 0 638 ms Diagnostics 0 048 ms 0 048 ms 0 048 ms 0 048 ms PLC Sweep Housekeeping Data Input Program 12 611 ms 17 135 ms 15 065 ms Time Execution Data Output Programmer Service Non Programmer Service Diagnostics A
61. PR WAI WAQ const none enable IN ok Q e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Example In the following example 1500 is converted to DEG and is placed in R0001 RAD TO DEG CONST 1500 000 IN R0001 85943 67 4 34 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 4 RELATIONAL FUNCTIONS 4 1 Comparisons Relational functions are used to compare two numbers This paragraph describes the following relational functions Abbreviation Function Description Page EQ Equal Test two numbers for equality 4 35 NE Not Equal Test two numbers for non equality 4 35 GT Greater Than Test for one number greater than another 4 35 GE Greater Than or Equal Test for one number greater than or equal to another 4 35 LT Less Than Test for one number less than another 4 35 LE Less Than or Equal Test for one number less than or equal to another 4 35 RANGE Range Determine whether a number is within a specified range 177 available for Release 4 5 or higher CPUs Relational functions are used to determine the relation of two values When the function receives power flow it compares input parameter I1 to input parameter I2 These parameters must be the same da
62. REAL Q 32 bit 2 I1 32 bit I2 32 bit 7 digit base 10 number sign and decimal 352 CPUs only The input and output data types must be the same The MUL and DIV functions do not support a mixed mode as the 80 75 PLCs do For example the MUL INT of 2 16 bit inputs produces a 16 bit product not a 32 bit product Using MUL DINT for a 32 bit product requires both inputs to be 32 bit The DIV INT divides a 16 bit I2 for a 16 bit result while DIV DINT divides a 32 bit I1 by 32 bit I2 for a 32 bit result These functions pass power if there is no math overflow If an overflow occurs the result is the largest value with the proper sign and no power flow Be careful to avoid overflows when using MUL and DIV functions If you have to convert INT to DINT values remember that the CPU uses standard 2 s complement with the sign extended to the highest bit of the second word ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 25 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set You must check the sign of the low 16 bit word and extend it into the second 16 bit word If the most significant bit in a 16 bit INT word is 0 positive move a 0 to the second word If the most significant bit in a 16 bit word is 1 negative move a 1 or hex OFFFFh to the second word Converting from DINT to INT is easier as the low 16 bit word first register is the INT part of a DINT 32 bit word The upper 16 bits or second wor
63. RUN position during the 5 seconds when the RUN light is flashing this will cause the faults to be cleared and the CPU will be placed into RUN mode The light will stop flashing and will go solid ON at this point The switch is required to be kept in either RUN or STOP position for at least 1 2 second before switching back to other position to take effect If you allow the 5 second timer to expire RUN light stops flashing the CPU will remain in its original state STOP FAULT mode with faults in the fault table If you turn the Key Switch from the STOP to RUN position again at this time the process will be repeated with this being the first transition ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 13 System Operation The following table provides a summary of how the two CPU parameter settings affecting the Key Switch R S Switch and IOScan Stop and the Key Switch s physical position affect PLC R S Key Switch Key I O Scan Stop Parameter in CPU Switch Parameter in CPU PLC Operation Configuration Position Configuration OFF X X All PLC Programmer Modes are allowed ON ON RUN X All PLC Programmer Modes are allowed ON OFF STOP X PLC not allowed to go to RUN ON Toggle Key X PLC goes to RUN if no fatal faults are present Switch from otherwise the RUN LED blinks for 5 seconds OFF STOP to ON RUN ON Toggle Key NO PLC goes to STOP NO IO Switch from ON RUN to OFF STO
64. SA SB SC only 96S cannot be used Example In the following example whenever input 10001 is set the output bit string represented by the nickname WORD2 is made a copy of WORDI left shifted by the number of bits represented by the nickname LENGTH The resulting open bits at the beginning of the output string are set to the value of 2610002 10001 OUTBIT WORD1 LENGTH 8 510002 Page 4 48 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 5 5 ROL ROR WORD The Rotate Left ROL function is used to rotate all the bits in a string a specified number of places to the left When rotation occurs the specified number of bits is rotated out of the input string to the left and back into the string on the right The Rotate Right ROR function rotates the bits in the string to the right When rotation occurs the specified number of bits is rotated out of the input string to the right and back into the string on the left A string length of 1 to 256 words can be selected for either function The number of places specified for rotation must be more than zero and less than the number of bits in the string Otherwise no movement occurs and no power flow is generated The ROL or ROR function passes power flow to the right unless the number of bits specified to be rotated is greater
65. Set There can be only one MCR instruction for each ENDMCR instruction The range for non nested MCRs and ENDMCRs cannot overlap the range of any other MCR ENDMCR pair or any JUMP LABEL pair of instructions Non nested MCRs cannot be within the scope of any other MCR ENDMCR pair or any JUMP LABEL pair In addition a JUMP LABEL pair or an MCR ENDMCR pair cannot be within the scope of an MCR ENDMCR pair The non nested MCR function is the only Master Control Relay function that can be used in a Release 1 C80 35 PLC The nested MCR function should be used for all new applications The nested form of the MCR function has the name MCRN and is available in Release 2 and later releases of 80 35 PLC An MCRN function can be nested with other MCRN functions provided they are nested correctly An MCRN instruction and its corresponding ENDMCRN instruction must be contained completely within another MCRN ENDMCRN pair An MCRN function can be placed anywhere within a program as long as itis properly nested with respect to other MCRNs and does not occur in the range of any non nested or non nested JUMP Use only one MCRN for each ENDMCRN with 351 CPUs There can be multiple MCRN functions corresponding to a single ENDMCRN except for the 351 and 352 CPUs as noted above This is analogous to the nested JUMP where you can have multiple JUMPs to the same LABEL For differences between the JUMP function and the MCR function refer to the Di
66. There is only one form of output from a function block or reference Outputs can never be written to constants Where the question marks appear on the left of a function block you will enter either the data itself or a reference location where the data is found Where question marks appear on the right of a function block you will usually enter a reference location for data to be output by the function block MUL INT This is the output parameter for the function block These are the input parameters I1 and I2 for the function block Most function blocks do not change input data instead they place the result of the operation in an output reference For functions which operate on tables a length can be selected for the function ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 25 System Operation Timer counter BITSEQ and ID functions require an address for the location of three words registers which store the current value preset value and a control word of the function This locating reference is located directly below the function block as shown below enable ONDTR Q 11 005 reset R address For more information on function block data required for timers and counters please refer to chapter EE Timers and Counters 2 7 4 Power Flow In and Out of a Function Power flows into a function block on the upper left Often
67. a table 8 Conversion Functions Describes how to convert a data item from one number type to another L8 9 Control Functions Describes how to limit program execution and alter the way the CPU LT executes the application program by using the control functions ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 1 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 1 RELAY FUNCTIONS This paragraph explains the use of contacts coils and links in ladder logic rungs Function Page Coils and negated coils 14 Normally open and normal closed contacts Ct Retentive and negated retentive coils 4 Positive and negative transition coils 5 SET and RESET coils 5 Retentive SET and RESET coils Horizontal and vertical links 7 Continuation coils and contacts 1 1 Using Contacts A contact is used to monitor the state of a reference Whether the contact passes power flow depends on the state or status of the reference being monitored and on the contact type A reference is ON if its state is 1 it is OFF if its state is 0 Table 4 1 Types of Contacts Type of Contact Display Contact Passes Power to Right Normally Open When reference is ON Normally Closed When reference is OFF Continuation Contact lt gt If the preceding continuation coil is set ON 1 2 Using Coils Coils are used to control disc
68. allow for this catch up feature For example if a timer in a program block is reset and the program block is not called is inactive for four minutes when the program block is called four minutes of time will already have accumulated This time is applied to the timer when enabled unless the timer is first reset 2 4 1 Parameters Parameter address Description The OFDT uses three consecutive words registers of R memory to store the following e Current value CV word 1 Preset value PV word 2 e Control word word 3 When you enter an OFDT you must enter an address for the location of these three consecutive words registers directly below the graphic representing the function Note Do not use this address with other instructions Caution Overlapping references will result in erratic operation of the timer enable When enable receives power flow the timer s current value is incremented time Time P1 specifies the type of unit milliseconds etc the registers are using PV PV is the value to copy into the timer s preset value when the timer is enabled or reset For a register R PV reference the PV parameter is specified as the second word of the address parameter For example an address parameter of 00001 would use R00002 as the PV parameter Output Qis energized when the current value is less than the preset value state is retentive on power fail
69. amp ROL amp ROL W Bit Rotate Right amp ROR amp ROR W Bit Test amp BT amp BT W Bit Set amp BS amp BS W Bit Clear amp BCL amp BCL W Bit Position amp BP amp BP_W Masked Compare amp MCM amp MCM_W Data Move Move amp MOV amp MOV_I amp MOV_BI amp MOV_W amp MOV_R Block Move amp BLKM amp BLKM_I amp BLKM_W amp BLKM_R Block Clear amp BLKC Shift Register amp SHF amp SHF_BI amp AR_W Bit Sequencer amp BI Communications Request amp COMMR Table Array Move amp AR amp AR_I amp AR_DI amp AR_BI amp AR_BY amp AR_W Search Equal amp SRCHE amp SRCHE_I amp SRCHE_DI amp SRCHE_BY amp SRCHE_W Search Not Equal amp SRCHN amp SRCHN_I amp SRCHN_DI amp SRCHN_BY amp SRCHN_W Search Greater Than amp SRCHGT amp SRCHGT_I amp SRCHGT_DI amp SRCHGT_BY amp SRCHGT_W Search Greater Than or Equal amp SRCHGE amp SRCHGE_I amp SRCHGE_DI amp SRCHGE_BY amp SRCHGE_W Search Less Than amp SRCHLT amp SRCHLT I amp SRCHLT DI amp SRCHLT BY amp SRCHLT W Search Less Than or Equal amp SRCHLE amp SRCHLE I amp SRCHLE DI amp SRCHLE BY amp SRCHLE_W_ Conversion Convert to Integer amp TO_INT amp TO_INT_BCD4 Convert to Double Integer amp TO_DINT amp BCD4 R Convert to BCD 4 amp BCD4 amp TO BCD4 I z Convert to REAL amp TO REAL amp TO REAL I amp TO REAL DI Convert to WORD amp TO W amp TO REAL W Truncate to Integer amp TRINT Truncate to Double Integer amp TRDINT Control Call a Subroutine amp CA I O amp DO PID ISA Algorithm amp PI
70. and Alspa C80 35 PLC Model 331 and higher is maintained by hardware time of day clock The time of day clock maintains seven time functions Year two digits Month Day of month Hour Minute Second Day of week The time of day clock is battery backed and maintains its present state across a power failure However unless you initialize the clock the values it contains are meaningless The application program can read and set the time of day clock using SVCREQ function No 7 The time of day clock can also be read and set from the CPU Configuration menu in the configuration software package Refer to chapter 11 CPU Configuration in the ALS 52201 Alspa P6 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa C80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs User s Manual The time of day clock is designed to handle month to month and year to year transitions It automatically compensates for leap years until the year 2079 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 29 System Operation 4 3 Watchdog Timer A watchdog timer in the Alspa C80 35 PLC is designed to catch catastrophic failure conditions that result in an unusually long sweep The timer value for the watchdog timer is 200 milliseconds 500 milliseconds in 351 this is a fixed value which cannot be changed The watchdog timer always starts from zero at the beginning of each sweep If the watchdog timeout valu
71. and download of application programs return of status information and control of the PLC In the Alspa C80 35 PLC the application user logic program which controls the end process to which the PLC is applied is controlled by a dedicated Instruction Sequencer Coprocessor ISCP The ISCP is implemented in hardware in the Model 313 and higher and in software in the Model 311 systems and the Micro PLC The 80188 microprocessor and the ISCP can execute simultaneously allowing the microprocessor to service communications while the ISCP is executing the bulk of the application program however the microprocessor must execute the non boolean function blocks ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 1 1 Introduction 2 FAULT HANDLING Faults occur in the Alspa 80 35 PLC Alspa 80 25 and Alspa 80 05 Micro PLC when certain failures conditions happen that affect the operation and performance of the system These conditions may affect the ability of the PLC to control a machine or process Other conditions may only act as an alert such as a low battery signal to indicate that the voltage of the battery protecting the memory is low and should be replaced The condition or failure is called a fault Faults are handled by a software alarm processor function which records the faults in either the PLC fault table or the I O fault table The Model 331 and Model 340 341 CPUs also time stamp the faults
72. be declared through the block declaration editor before a CALL instruction can be used for that subroutine A maximum of 64 subroutine block declarations in the program and 64 CALL instructions are allowed for each logic block in the program The maximum size of a subroutine block is 16K bytes or 3000 rungs but the main program and all subroutines must fit within the logic size constraints for that CPU model Subroutine blocks are not available for the Alspa 80 25 PLC nor for the Micro The use of subroutines is optional Dividing a program into smaller subroutines can simplify programming and reduce the overall amount of logic needed for the program ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 15 System Operation 2 1 1 Examples of Using Subroutine Blocks As an example the logic for a program could be divided into three subroutines each of which could be called as needed from the program In this example the program might contain little logic serving primarily to sequence SUBROUTINE 2 SUBROUTINE 3 SUBROUTINE 4 A subroutine block can be used many times as the program executes Logic which needs to be repeated several times in a program could be entered in a subroutine block Calls would then be made to that subroutine block to access the logic In this way total program size is reduced the subroutine blocks PROGRAM SUBROUTINE ee 2 Page 2 16 Alspa C80 35
73. calculated PID Output directly to Both PID algorithms can impose amplitude and rate of change limits on the output Control Variable The maximum rate of change is determined by dividing the maximum 100 CV value 32000 by the Minimum Slew Time if specified as greater than 0 For example if the Minimum Slew Time is 100 seconds the rate limit will be 320 CV counts per second If the dt solution time was 50 milliseconds the new CV output can not change more than 320 50 1000 or 16 CV counts from the previous CV output The CV output is then compared to the CV Upper and CV Lower Clamp values If either limit is exceeded the CV output is set to the clamped value If either rate or amplitude limits are exceeded modifying CV the internal integrator value is adjusted to match the limited value to avoid reset windup Finally the block checks the Output Polarity 2nd bit of the Config Word Ref 12 and changes the sign of the output if the bit is 1 CV Clamped PID Output or Clamped PID Output if Output Polarity bit set If the block is in Automatic mode the final CV is placed in the Manual Command Ref 13 If the block is in Manual mode the PID equation is skipped as CV is set by the Manual Command but all the rate and amplitude limits are still checked That means that the Manual Command can not change the output above the CV Upper Clamp or below the CV Lower Clamps and the output can not change faster than the Minimum Slew Time allowed P
74. components It may be required if you are using only Proportional Kp gain and you want the CV to be a non zero value when the PV equals the SP and the Error 15 0 In this case set the CV Bias to the desired CV when the PV is at the SP CV Bias can also be used for feed forward control where another PID loop or control algorithm is used to adjust the CV output of this PID loop If an Integral Ki gain is used the CV Bias would normally be 0 as the integrator acts as an automatic bias Just start up in Manual mode and use the Manual Command word Ref 13 to set the integrator to the desired CV then switch to Automatic mode This also works if Ki is 0 except the integrator will not be adjusted based on the Error after going into Automatic mode The following diagram shows how the PID algorithms work a43646 PROPORTIONAL BIAS 7 TERM SP Error Sign R DEAD INTEGRAL Ki SLEW UPPER LOWER POLARITY cv XA TIME g LIMIT CLAMP ft Deriv Action 2 VALUE gt DERIVATIVE TIME TERM Kd Figure 4 1 Independent Term Algorithm PIDIND The ISA Algorithm PIDISA is similar except the Kp gain is factored out of Ki and Kd so that the integral gain is Kp Ki and derivative gain is Kp Kd The Error sign DerivAction and Polarity are set by bits in the Config Word user parameter 9 10 7 CV Amplitude and Rate Limits The block does not send the
75. described in the ALS 52201 Alspa PS 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa C80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs User s Manual Two types of locks are available Type of Lock Description View Once locked you cannot zoom into that subroutine Edit Once locked the information in the subroutine cannot be edited A previously view locked or edit locked subroutine may be unlocked in the block declaration editor unless it is permanently view locked or permanently edit locked The display zoom level function ALT X can be used to display the lock status of the subroutine in the block declaration editor Move the cursor to the desired block and press ALT X A search or search and replace function may be performed on a view locked subroutine If the target of the search is found in a view locked subroutine one of the following messages is displayed instead of logic Found in locked block block name Continue Quit or Cannot write to locked block block name Continue Quit You may continue or abort the search For more information on search and search replace please refer to chapter 3 Program Editing in the ALS 52201 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs User s Manual Folders that contain locked subroutines may be cleared or deleted If a folder contains locked subroutines these blocks remain locked when the Alspa P8 25 35 05 software Copy Backup and Restore fo
76. digits The mantissa may be preceded by a positive or negative sign If no sign is entered the floating point number is assumed to be positive If an exponent is entered it must be preceded by the letter E or e and the mantissa must contain a decimal point to avoid mistaking it for a hexadecimal number The exponent may be preceded by a sign but if none is provided it is assumed to be positive If no exponent is entered it is assumed to be zero No spaces are allowed in a floating point number To provide ease of use several formats are accepted in both command line and field data entry These formats include an integer a decimal number or a decimal number followed by an exponent These numbers are converted to a standard form for display once the user has entered the data and pressed the Enter key Examples of valid floating point number entries and their normalized display are shown below Entered 250 4 2383019 34 0 0036209 12 E 9 0 0004E 11 731 0388 99 20003 29 Displayed 250 0000 4 000000 2383019 34 00000 0 003620900 1 20000 10 4 00000E 15 731 0388 9 92000E 28 Examples of invalid floating point number entries are shown below Invalid Entry Explanation 433 23 Missing decimal point 10e 19 Missing decimal point 10 19 The mantissa cannot contain spaces between digits or characters This is accepted as 10 e0 and an error message 15 display
77. e lt 255 Any value _js 2e 127 f 0 Non zero 15 2 126 Qf 0 0 0 f themantissa The mantissa is a binary fraction the exponent The exponent is an integer E such that E 127 is the power of 2 by which the mantissa must be multiplied to yield the floating point value the sign bit the multiplication operator For example consider the floating point number 12 5 The IEEE floating point binary representation of the number is 01000001 01001000 00000000 00000000 or 41480000 hex in hexadecimal form The most significant bit the sign bit is zero 520 The next eight most significant bits are 10000010 or 130 decimal e 130 Page E 2 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Using Floating Point Numbers The mantissa is stored as a decimal binary number with the decimal point preceding the most significant of the 23 bits Thus the most significant bit in the mantissa is a multiple of 21 the next most significant bit is a multiple of 2 2 and so on to the least significant bit which is a multiple of 2 23 The final 23 bits the mantissa are 1001000 00000000 00000000 The value of the mantissa then is 0 5625 that is 27 2 4 Since gt 0 and lt 255 we use the third formula in the table above 15 2 127 1 210 2130 127 1 5625 1 23 1 5625 8 1 5625 12 5 number Thus you can see that the above binary representation is correct The range
78. element in the shift register 15 shifted into Q The highest reference of the shift register element of IN is shifted into the vacated element starting at ST The contents of the shift register are accessible throughout the program because they are overlaid on absolute locations in logic addressable memory The function passes power to the right whenever power is received through the enable logic enable FETSE ok WORD reset R output parameter value to be shifted first bit or ST 4 66 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 6 4 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When enable is energized and R is not the shift is performed R When R is energized the shift register located at ST is filled with zeros IN IN contains the value to be shifted into the first bit or word of the shift register For SHFR_BIT any discretereference may be used it does not need to be byte aligned However 16 bits beginning with the referenceaddress specified are displayed on line ST ST contains the first bit or word of the shift register For SHFR any discrete reference may be used it does not need to be byte aligned However 16 bits beginning with the reference address specified are displayed on line ok The ok output is energized whenever the function is enabled
79. example In this example the coil light 01 is turned on when an oversweep condition occurs the light and the OV SWP contact remain until the 7010359 contact is closed ov swp light 01 1 1510359 ov swp Ex BS Page 3 4 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Fault Explanations and Correction 1 5 Fault Reference Definitions The alarm processor maintains the states of the 128 system discrete bits in S memory These fault references can be used to indicate where a fault has occurred and what type of fault it is Fault references are assigned to S SA SB and SC memory and they each have a nickname These references are available for use in the application program as required Refer to chapter 2 System Operation for a list of the system status references 1 6 Additional Fault Effects Two faults described previously have additional effects associated with them These are described in the following table Side Effect Description PLC CPU Software Failure Whenever a PLC CPU software failure is logged the Alspa C80 35 or 80 25 CPU immediately transitions into a special error sweep mode No activity is permitted in this mode The only method of clearing this condition is to reset the PLC i e cycle power PLC Sequence Store Failure During a sequence store a store of
80. example on next page ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 69 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set MERE enable SEQ reset R LEN 100001 direction DIR number STEP starting address ST address Enter the beginning address here The control word stores the state of the boolean inputs and outputs of its associated function block as shown in the following format 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 54 3 2 1 0 EE gt Reserved Reserved OK status output EN enable input Bits 0 to 13 are not used 6 5 2 Parameters Parameter address enable R DIR STEP ST ok LEN Description Address is the location of the bit sequencer s current step length and the last enable and ok statuses When the function is enabled if it was not enabled on the previous sweep and if R is not energized the bit sequence shift is performed When is energized the bit sequencer s step number is set to the value in STEP default 1 and the bit sequenceris filled with zeros except for the current step number bit When DIR is energized the bit sequencer s step number is incremented prior to the shift Otherwise it is decremented Wh
81. example shown above we used the contact T1 and the coil 70M100 to force one and only one execution otherwise the masked compare would repeat not necessarily delivering the desired results ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 59 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 6 DATA MOVE FUNCTIONS Data move functions provide basic data move capabilities This paragraph describes the following data move functions Abbreviation Function Description Page MOVE Copy data as individual bits The maximum length allowed is 256 4 60 words except MOVE BIT is 256 bits Data can be moved into a different data type without prior conversion BLKMOV Block Move Copy a block of seven constants to a specified memory location The constants are input as part of the function r9 BLKCLR Block Clear Replacethe content of a block of data with all zeros This function can T 95 be used to clear an area of bit 961 M G or 96 T or word R 96 AT or WAQ memory The maximum length allowed is 256 words SHFR Shift Register Shiftone or more data words into a table The maximum length allowed 1 96 is 256 words BITSEQ Bit Sequencer Perform a bit sequence shift through an array of bits The maximum 1 69 length allowed is 256 words COMMREQ Communications Allow the program to communicate with an intelligent module such as Ct Request an N80 Communications Module or a Programmable Coprocessor
82. fault occurred on a different module the normally closed contact is on and the shutdown occurs FST SCN pil R0600 IO_PRES M0007 C M0007 R0603 C IO PRES 0007 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 117 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 9 8 SVCREQ 16 Read Elapsed Time Clock Use the SVCREQ function with function number 16 in order to read the value of the system s elapsed time clock This clock tracks elapsed time in seconds since the PLC powered on The timer will roll over approximately once every 100 years This function has an output parameter block only The parameter block has a length of 3 words seconds from power on low order address seconds from power on high order address 1 100 microsecond ticks address 2 The first two words are the elapsed time in seconds The last word is the number of 100 microsecond ticks in the current second Example In the following example when internal coil 70M0233 is on the value of the elapsed time clock is read and coil 20M0234 is set When it is off the value is read again The difference between the values is then calculated and the result is stored in register memory at location 9 0250 The parameter block for the first read is at RO127 for the second read at RO131 The calculation ignores the number of hundred microsecond ticks and the fact tha
83. for counters and transitional coils Note that counters do not use the same kind of transition bits as coils Transition bits for counters are stored within the locating reference In the Model 331 and higher override bits can be set When override bits are set the associated references cannot be changed from the program or the input device they can only be changed on command from the programmer CPU Models 323 321 313 311 211 and the Micro CPUs do not support overriding discrete references 2 4 Retentiveness of Data Data is said to be retentive if it is saved by the PLC when the PLC is stopped The Alspa 8000 PLC preserves program logic fault tables and diagnostics overrides and output forces word data R AI AQ bit data 961 SC G fault bits and reserved bits Q and M data unless used with non retentive coils and word data stored in Q and 96M T data is not saved Although as stated above SC bit data is retentive 905 SA and SB are non retentive Q and M references non retentive cleared at power up when the PLC switches from STOP to RUN whenever they are used with non retentive coils Non retentive coils include coils negated coils SET coils S and RESET coils R When Q or M references are used with retentive coils or are used as function block outputs the contents are retained through power loss and RUN to STOP to RUN transitions Retentive coils includ
84. format of relays 2 2 function block parameters 2 21 power flow 2 207 G GE 4 37 Global data 2 37 Global data references 2 19 Greater than function 4 33 Greater than or equal function 4 31 GT 4 353 H Hexadecimal display of fault information 3 6 ALS 52102 Horizontal link 4 T7 Housekeeping 2 87 HRD CPU 2 23 HRD 2 21 HRD 510 2 27 T O data formats 2 367 fault table 3 1 3 mam CTRL F for hexadecimal display of fault explanations 3 1 fault action 1 iB fault actions for specific faults B 17 fault address 1 fault group B 1 fault specific data B 1 fault time stamp B 1 hexadecimal display of fault information 3 83B 33B M M 6 a long short indicator B point B 1 rack 1 reference address 1 slot B o symbolic fault specific data B 177 I O structure Alspa C80 35 PLC 2 347 I O system Alspa C80 05 PLC 2 34 Micro CPU and I O 2 387 T O system Alspa C80 25 PLC 2 347 model 25 I O modules 2 3T I O system Alspa C80 35 PLC 2 3 default conditions for model 35 output modules OE diagnostic data global data 2 3 I O data formats mea model 35 I O modules 351 Informational faults 3 no user program present 3 137 password access failure Input references discrete 2 197 Input register references analog 2 13 Input scan
85. high speed counters When the function receives power flow it performs the conversion making the result available via output Q The function passes power flow when power is received unless the specified conversion would result in a value that is outside the range 0 to 9999 enable EE ok TO BCD4 value to be converted output parameter 8 1 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the conversion is performed IN IN contains a reference for the integer value to be converted to BCD 4 ok The ok output is energized when the function is performed without error Q o Output Q contains the BCD 4 form of the original value in IN Page 4 82 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 8 1 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow 1 Q AT 905 G WAI WAQ const IN e e e e ok Q Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Example In the following example whenever input 10002 is set and no errors exist the integer at input location 10017 to 10032 is converted to four BCD digits and the result is stored in memory locations 00033 to Q0048 Coil Q1432 is used to check for successful conversion 1510002 bal 1 BCD4 510017 IN QI 500033
86. integral analog module fault occurs the reference address refers to the first point on the block where the fault occurred Table B 8 I O Reference Address Byte Description Range 0 Memory Type 0 FF 1 2 Offset 0 12K decimal The memory type byte is one of the following values Table B 9 I O Reference Address Memory Type Name Value Hexadecimal Analog input 0 Andogouput 0C 0 0D 1 U SEY Discreteinput Discreteouput l20or48 Disretegoupd lF DL J O 2 3 Fault Address The I O fault address is a six byte address containing rack slot bus block and point address of the I O point which generated the fault The point address is a word all other addresses are one byte each five values may not be present in a fault When an I O fault address does not contain all five addresses a 7F hex appears in the address to indicate where the significance stops For example if 7F appears in the bus byte then the fault is a module fault Only rack and slot values are significant Page B 10 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Interpreting Faults Using Alspa P8 25 35 05 Software 2 4 Rack The rack number ranges from 0 to 7 Zero is the main rack i e the one containing the PLC Racks 1 to 7 are expansion racks connected to the PLC through a Bus Transmitter Module i
87. loop gain 1 Set all the User Parameters to 0 then set the CV Upper Lower Clamps to the highest and lowest CV expected Set the Sample Period to the estimated process time constant above 10 to 100 Put block in Manual mode and set Manual Command Ref 13 at different values to check if CV can be moved to Upper and Lower Clamp Record PV value at some CV point and load it into SP Set a small gain such as 100 Maximum CV Maximum into Kp and turn off Manual mode Step SP by 2 to 10 of the Maximum PV range and observe PV response Increase Kp if PV step response is too slow or reduce Kp if PV overshoots and oscillates without reaching a steady value Once a Kp is found start increasing Ki to get overshooting that dampens out to a steady value in 2 to 3 cycles This may required reducing Kp Also try different step sizes and CV operating points After suitable Kp and Ki gains are found try adding Kd to get quicker responses to input changes providing it doesn t cause oscillations Kd is often not needed and will not work with noisy PV Check gains over different SP operating points and add Dead Band and Minimum Slew Time if needed Some Reverse Acting processes may need setting Config Word Error Sign or Polarity bits Page 4 134 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 10 11 Setting Loop Gains Ziegler and Nichols Tuning Approach Once the
88. on the CPU or other module has a low signal Correction Replace the battery Do not remove power from the rack 2 8 Constant Sweep Time Exceeded The Fault Group Constant Sweep Time Exceeded occurs when the PLC CPU operates in CONSTANT SWEEP mode and it detects that the sweep has exceeded the constant sweep timer The fault extra data contains the actual time of the sweep in the first two bytes and the name of the program in the next eight bytes The fault action for this group is Diagnostic Correction 1 Increaseconstant sweep time 2 Remove logic from application program Page 3 12 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Fault Explanations and Correction 2 9 Application Fault The Fault Group Application Fault occurs when the PLC CPU detects a fault in the user program The fault action for this group is Diagnostic Error Code 7 Name Subroutine Call Stack Exceeded Description Subroutine calls are limited to a depth of 8 A subroutine can call another subroutine which in turn can call another subroutine until 8 call levels are attained Correction Modify program so that subroutine call depth does not exceed 8 Error Code 1B Name Comm Req Not Processed Due To PLC Memory Limitations Description No wait communication requests can be placed in the queue faster than they can be processed e g one per sweep In a situation like this when the communica
89. on the change of the Error term since the last PID solution which may cause a large change in the output if the SP value is changed If this is not desired the third bit of the Config Word can be set to 1 to calculate the Derivative based on the change of the PV The dt or Delta Time is determined by subtracting the last PID solution clock time for this block from the current PLC elapsed time clock dt Current PLC Elapsed Time clock PLC Elapsed Time Clock at Last PID solution Derivative Error previous Error dt or PV previous PV dt if 3rd bit of Config Word set to 1 The Independent term PID PID IND algorithm calculates the output as PID Output Kp Error Ki Error dt Kd Derivative CV Bias The standard ISA PID ISA algorithm has a different form PID Output Kc Error Error Td Derivative CV Bias where Kc is the controller gain and Ti is the Integral time and Td is the Derivative time The advantage of ISA is that adjusting the Kc changes the contribution for the integral and derivative terms as well as the proportional one which may make loop tuning easier If you have PID gains in terms or Ti and Td use Kc Ki Kc Ti and Kd Kc Td to convert them to use as PID User Parameter inputs ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 131 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set The CV Bias term above is an additive term separate from the PID
90. passwords 2 3 privilege level change requests 2 37 privilege levels 2 37 Service Request interrogate I O 4 12 read elapsed power down time 4 1277 read master checksum 4 1207 Service request function 4 10 4 1 2 23 ALS 52102 SFT_FLT 2 23 SFT SIO 2 237 SHFR 4 6 Shift left function 4 4 Shift register function 4 667 Shift right function 4 4 SHL 4 40 SHR 4 47 Signed integer 2 27 SIN 4 30 Sine function 4 307 Software failure option module 3 1 SORT 4 29 Square root function 4 297 SRCH_EQ 4 77 SRCH_GE 4 79 SRCH_GT 4 7 SRCH LE 4 77 SRCH LT 4 79 SRCH NE 4 79 Standard program sweep mode 2 T Standard program sweep variations 2 1T Status references system 2 197 2 27 STOP mode 2 4 STOR ER 2 23 SUB 4 2 Subroutine blocks 2 11 Subroutines locking unlocking 2 57 Subtraction function 4 23 SVCREQ 4 10 change read task state and number of words to checksum 4 10 change read time of day clock 4 1097 clear fault table 4 11 interrogate I O 4 12 read elapsed power down time 4 127 read elapsed time clock 4 11 read I O override status 4 11 read last logged fault table entry 4 17 read master checksum 4 12 shut down stop PLC iud Index Sweep time calculation 2 1 Sweep PLC 2 application program logic scan constant sweep time mode 2 1
91. per access of the PID function 9 10 2 Valid Memory Types R WAI WAQ const Parameter e Valid reference or place where power flow through the function Page 4 124 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 9 10 3 PID Parameter Bloc Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Besides the 2 input words and the 3 Manual control contacts the PID block uses 13 of the parameters in the RefArray These parameters must be set before calling the block The other parameters are used by the PLC and are non configurable The Ref shown in the table below is the same RefArray Address at the bottom of the PID block The number after the plus sign is the offset in the array For example if the RefArray starts at R100 the R113 will contain the Manual Command used to set the Control Variable and the integrator in Manual mode Table 4 4 PID Parameters Overview Register Parameter Low Bit Units Range of Values Ref 0000 Loop Number Integer 0 to 255 for user display only JRef 0001 Algorithm N A set and maintained by the Non configurable PLC Ref 0002 Sample Period 10 milliseconds 0 every sweep to 65535 10 9 Min Use at least 10 for 80 35 PLCs see Note on 13 10 Ref 0003 Dead Band PV Counts 0 to 32000 never negative Ref 0004 Dead Band PV Counts 32000 to 0 never positive JR
92. same length as the I O fault table entry 1 3 Rack The rack number ranges from 0 to 7 Zero is the main rack containing the PLC Racks 1 to 7 are expansion racks connected to the PLC through an expansion cable 1 4 Slot The slot number ranges from 0 to 9 The PLC CPU always occupies slot 1 in the main rack rack 0 1 5 Task The task number ranges from 0 to 65535 Sometimes the task number gives additional information for PLC engineers typically the task can be ignored Page 4 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Interpreting Faults Using Alspa P8 25 35 05 Software 1 6 PLC Fault Group Fault group is the highest classification of a fault It identifies the general category of the fault The fault description text displayed by Alspa P8 25 35 05 software is based on the fault group and the error codes Table B 1 lists the possible fault groups in the PLC fault table The Additional PLC Fault Codes group is declared for the handling of new fault conditions in the system without the PLC having to specifically know the alarm codes All unrecognized PLC type alarm codes belong to this group Table 1 PLC Fault Groups Group Number Decimal Hexadecimal Group Name Fault Action 1 1 Loss of or missing rack Fatal 4 4 Loss of or missing option module Diagnostic 5 5 Addition of or extra rack Diagnostic 8 8 Addition of or extra
93. space hours minutes minutes seconds space seconds day of week day of week Page 4 112 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual address address 1 address 2 address 3 address 4 address 5 address 6 address 7 address 8 address 9 address 10 address 11 Example output parameter block Read Date and Time in Packed ASCII Format Mon Oct 2 1989 at 23 13 00 0 3 39 38 31 20 20 30 32 30 32 20 3A 33 33 31 30 3A 20 30 33 30 ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 9 5 SVCREQ 13 Shut Down Stop PLC Use SVCREQ function 13 in order to stop the PLC at the end of the current sweep All outputs will go to their designated default states at the beginning of the next PLC sweep An informational fault is placed in the PLC fault table noting that a SHUT DOWN PLC function block was executed The I O scan will continue as configured This function has no parameter block Example In the following example when a Loss of I O Module fault occurs SVCREQ function 13 executes Since no parameter block is needed the PARM input is not used however the programming software requires that an entry be made for PARM This example uses a JUMP to the end of the program to force a shutdown if the Shutdown PLC function executes successfully This JUMP and LABEL are needed because the transition to STOP mode does n
94. system It may be done either before or after programming using the configuration software or Hand Held Programmer however it is recommended that configuration be done first If that has not been done you should refer to the ALS 52201 Alspa 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa C80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs User s Manual to decide whether it is best to begin programming at this time This chapter contains the following paragraphs Paragraph Title Description Page 1 Relay Functions Describes contacts coils and links 2 Timers and Describes on delay and stopwatch type timers up counters and down Cr Counters counters 3 Math Functions Describesaddition subtraction multiplication division modulo division o z and square root trigonometric functions logarithmic exponential functions and radian conversion Note that trigonometric functions logarithmic exponential functions and radian conversion functions are only available with the model 352 CPU 4 Relational Functions Describes how to compare two numbers for equality non equality 125 greater than greater than or equal to less than and less than or equal to 5 Bit Operation Describeshow to perform comparison and move operations on bitstrings 149 Functions 6 Data Move Functions Describes basic data move capabilities 1 90 Table Functions Describeshow to use table functions to enter values into and copy values 04 75 out of
95. than the total length of the string or is less than zero The result is placed in output string Q If you want the input string to be rotated the output parameter Q must use the same memory location as the input parameter IN The entire rotated string is written on each scan that power is received enable ox WORD word to be rotated output parameter LEN 100001 number of bits N 5 5 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the rotation is performed IN IN contains the first word to be rotated N N contains the number of places that the array is to be rotated ok The ok output is energized when the rotation is energized and the rotation length is not greater than the array size Q Output Q contains the first word of the rotated array LEN LEN is the number of words in the array to be rotated ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 49 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 5 5 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter AI AQ const enable IN ok Q Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function SA SB or PSC only 905 cannot be used Example In the following example whenever input 10001 is set the input bit string R0001 is rotated 3 bits and the result is placed in RO002 After execution of this function th
96. the device located at rack 1 slot 2 of the PLC If an error occurs processing the COMMREQ 00100 is set SYSID TASK For systems that do not have expansion racks the SYSID must be zero for the main rack Page 4 74 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 7 TABLE FUNCTIONS Table functions are used to perform the following functions Abbreviation Function Description Page ARRAY MOVE 2228 a specified number of data elements from a source array to a E 76 destination array SRCH_EQ Search Equal Search for all array values equal to a specified value LT 79 Search Not Equal Search for all array values not equal to a specified value SRCH_GT Search Greater Than Greater Than Search for all array values greater than a specified value B 79 Se Greater Than Search for all array values greater than or equal to a specified value aa 79 or Equal SRCH_LT SearchLessThan Less Than Search for all Search for all array values less than a specified value values less than a Search for all array values less than a specified value value SRCH_LE aaa Less Than Search for all array values less than or equal to a specified value 79 or Equal The maximum length allowed for these functions is 32767 bytes or words or 262136 bits bits are available for ARRAY_MOVE only Ta
97. three process model parameters K Tp and Tc are determined they can be used to estimate initial PID loop gains The following approach developed by Ziegler and Nichols in the 1940 s is designed to provide good response to system disturbances with gains producing a amplitude ratio of 1 4 The amplitude ratio is the ratio of the second peak over the first peak in the closed loop response 1 Calculate the Reaction rate R K Tc 2 For Proportional control only calculate Kp as Kp 1 R Tp Te K Tp 3 For Proportional and Integral control use Kp 0 9 R Tp 0 9 Tc K Tp Ki 0 3 Kp Tp 4 For Proportional Integral and Derivative control use Kp G R Tp where is from 1 2 to 2 0 Ki 0 5 Kp Tp Kd 0 5 Kp Tp 5 Check that the Sample Period is in the range Tp Tc 10 to Tp Tc 1000 Another approach the Ideal Tuning procedure is designed to provide the best response to SP changes delayed only by the Tp process delay or dead time Kp 2 3 K Tp Ki Tc Kd Ki 4 if Derivative term is used Once initial gains are determined they must be converted to integer User Parameters To avoid scaling problems the Process gain K should be calculated as a change in input PV Counts divided by the output step change in CV Counts and not in process PV or CV engineering units All times should also be specified in seconds Once Kp Ki and Kd are determined Kp and Kd can be multi
98. value is out of range Q Q contains the double precision signed integer form of the original value in IN It is possible for a loss of precision to occur when converting from REAL to DINT since the REAL has 24 significant bits ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 85 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 8 3 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow 1 Q M T S G R AI WAQ const none enable IN ok e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Example In the following example whenever input 10002 is set the integer value at input location 9610017 is converted to a double precision signed integer and the result is placed in location 6ROO01 The output Q1001 is set whenever the function executes successfully a 510002 ENTS MEO dl DINT I0017 IN 0001 __ 8 4 gt REAL INT DINT BCD 4 WORD The Convert to Real function is used to output the real value of the input data The original data is not changed by this function The output data can be used directly as input for another program function When the function receives power flow it performs the conversion making the result available via output Q The function passes power flow when power is receiv
99. which follows from being executed Alspa 8 programming software provides END OF PROGRAM LOGIC marker to indicate the end of program execution This marker is used if no END function is programmed in the logic Example In the following example an END is programmed to terminate the end of the current sweep Placing an END function in SFC logic or in logic called by SFC produces an END Function Executed from SFC Action fault in Release 7 or later CPUs In pre Release 7 CPUs it did not work correctly but no Fault was generated For information about this fault refer to page 3 11 9 4 MCR rungs between an active Master Control Relay MCR and its corresponding End Master Control Relay ENDMCR function are executed without power flow to coils An ENDMCR function associated with the MCR is used to resume normal program execution Unlike the JUMP instruction MCRs can only occur in the forward direction The ENDMCR instruction must appear after its corresponding MCR instruction in a program Alspa P8 25 35 05 software supports two forms of the MCR function a non nested and a nested form The non nested form has been available since Release 1 of the software and has the name MCR Model 351 CPUs do not have the non nested form i e MCR Use only the nested form 1 e MCRN with 351 CPUs ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 97 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction
100. words Enabled time for single length units of type R and AW time has been measured between CPU and HSC DOIO is the time to output values to discrete output module Where there is more than one possible case the time indicated above represents the worst possible case gs ue tA Timing information for the Micro PLC See the ALS 52119 Alspa C80 05 Micro PLC User s Manual for this information In the next release of this manual these figures will be presented here Timing information for the 351 352 PLC See pag 4 5 and following Instruction Sizes for 351 and 352 CPUs Memory size is the number of bytes required by the instruction in a ladder diagram application program Model 351 and 352 CPUs require three 3 bytes for most standard boolean functions see Table A 2 Table A 2 Instruction Sizes for 351 and 352 CPUs Function Size No operation Pop stack and AND to top Pop stack and OR to top Duplicate top of stack Pop stack Initial stack Label Jump other instructions Function blocks seF Tpble A 1 nm A 6 Alspa C80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Appendix Interpreting Faults Using B Alspa P8 25 35 05 Software The Alspa C80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs maintain two fault tables the I O fault table for faults generated by I O devices including I O controllers and the PLC fault table for internal PLC faults Th
101. 0 44 53 23 43 51 23 42 51 23 41 49 20 39 46 20 38 47 21 38 45 21 39 46 20 39 46 21 37 46 21 38 47 19 39 46 21 37 47 19 38 46 20 37 45 19 37 47 19 38 46 20 39 46 21 37 46 20 38 46 20 38 46 20 38 45 19 38 46 20 38 46 20 38 46 21 39 46 19 40 46 19 38 46 21 1 0 1 1 0 1 Instruction Timing Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Increment 311 313 331 341 SS 1 62 1 62 6 60 1 31 12 61 12 64 15 78 6 33 1 62 1 63 6 60 1 31 1 35 1 29 1 78 0 78 0 69 0 68 0 88 0 37 1 62 1 62 2 54 1 31 0 07 0 07 0 10 0 05 1 29 1 15 7 16 2 06 3 24 3 24 13 20 2 61 0 03 0 03 0 39 0 79 0 81 0 82 5 58 1 25 1 29 1 15 7 16 2 06 1 93 1 97 3 17 1 55 4 33 4 34 5 72 2 44 1 53 1 49 2 29 1 03 1 93 1 97 3 17 1 55 1 93 1 93 3 17 1 52 6 49 6 47 8 63 3 82 1 54 1 51 2 29 1 05 1 93 1 93 3 17 1 52 3 83 3 83 5 62 2 59 8 61 8 61 11 29 4 88 3 44 3 44 4 69 2 03 3 83 3 83 5 62 2 59 3 86 3 83 5 62 2 52 8 62 8 61 11 30 4 87 3 47 3 44 4 69 2 00 3 86 3 83 5 62 2 32 3 83 3 86 5 59 2 48 8 62 8 60 11 29 4 88 3 44 3 44 4 69 2 00 3 83 3 86 5 55 2 48 3 79 3 90 5 59 2 55 8 60 8 61 11 30 4 86 3 46 3 44 4 69 2 02 3 79 3 90 5 59 2 55 Page A 3 Size 13 13 13 27 27 9 15 15 15 13 Instruction Timing Table A 1 Instruction Timing Continued Function Enabled Disabled Increment Group Function 311 313 331 341 311 313 331 341 311 313 331 34
102. 000 Module and Configuration Do Not Match The PLC operating system software system configurer generates this fault when the module occupying slot is not of the same type that the configuration file indicates should be in that slot 1 Replace the module in the slot with one of the type that the configuration file indicates is in that slot 2 Update the configuration file The following diagram identifies each field in the fault entry for the System Configuration Mismatch fault displayed above 00 000000 000373F2 0100 000000000000000000047E0C0B0301000000000000000000 Fault Extra Data Error Code Fault Action Fault Group Task Slot Rack Spare Long Short ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page B 3 Interpreting Faults Using Alspa 8 25 35 05 Software The System Configuration Mismatch fault entry is explained below All data is in hexadecimal Field Value Description The following paragraphs describe each field in the fault entry Included are tables describing the range of values each field may have 1 1 Long Short Indicator This byte indicates whether the fault contains 8 bytes or 24 bytes of fault extra data Type Code Fault Extra Data Short 00 8 bytes Long 01 24 bytes 1 2 Spare These six bytes are pad bytes used to make the PLC fault table entry exactly the
103. 0001 is turned on 9 2 3 Enhanced DO I O Function for the 331 and Higher CPUs If the Enhanced DO I O function is used in a program the program should not be loaded by a version of Alspa P8 25 35 software earlier than 4 01 An enhanced version of the DO I O DOIO function is available for Release 4 20 or later of Models 331 and higher CPUs This enhanced version of the DOIO function can only be used on a single discrete input or discrete output 8 point 16 or 32 point module The ALT parameter identifies the slot in the main rack that the module is located in For example a constant value of 2 in this parameter indicates to the CPU that it is to execute the enhanced version of the DOIO function block for the module in slot 2 The only checking done by the enhanced DOIO function block is to check the state of the module in the slot specified to see if the module is ok The enhanced DOIO function only applies to modules located in the main rack Therefore the ALT parameter must be between 2 and 5 for a 5 slot rack or 2 and 10 for a 10 slot rack ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 95 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set The start and end references must be either I or Q These references specify the first and last reference the module is configured for For example if a 16 point input module is configured at 10001 to 9610016 in slot 10 of a 10 slot ma
104. 0005 LEN 100100 Example 2 In this example the shift register operates on memory locations 0001 to 75M0100 When the reset reference CLEAR is active the SHFR function fills M0001 to MO100 with zeros When NXT_CYC is active and CLEAR is not the SHFR function shifts the data in M0001 to M0100 down by one bit The bit in 70Q0033 is shifted into 0001 while the bit shifted out of 0100 is written to 0200 NXT CYC I SHFR_ 1 1 I IR Q M0200 LEN 00100 M0001 ST 19500033 IN 4 68 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 6 5 BITSEQ The Bit Sequencer BITSEQ function performs a bit sequence shift through an array of bits The BITSEQ function has five input parameters and one output parameter The operation of the function depends on the previous value of the parameter EN as shown in the following table R Current EN Previous EN Current Bit Sequencer Execution Execution Execution Execution oF OFF OFF Bit sequencer does not execute oF ON Bitsequencerincrements decrementsby 1 oF or Bitsequencerdoesnotexecute OFF Bitsequencerdoesnotexecute ON ON OFF ONOFF Bitsequencerresets si The reset in
105. 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 5 Preface 2 RELATED PUBLICATIONS ALS 52105 Alspa 80 25 PLC User s Manual ALS 52109 MegaBasic Language for PCM Reference Manual and Programmer s Guide ALS 52117 Alspa 80 35 PLC Installation Manual ALS 52118 Alspa C80 35 PLC I O Module Specifications ALS 52119 Alspa C80 05 Micro PLC User s Manual ALS 52201 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa C80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs User s Manual ALS 52202 Hand Held Programmer for Alspa C80 35 C60 25 and C80 05 PLCs User s Manual ALS 52203 PCM Development Software PCOP for Alspa 8000 PLCs User s Manual ALS 52307 Alspa CES0 20 N60 Bus Interface Unit User s Manual ALS 52310 FIP Bus Controller FBC for Alspa C80 75 PLC User s Manual ALS 52311 Alspa CES0 20 FIP Bus Interface Unit User s Manual ALS 52313 Alspa 80 35 Remote Scanner User s Manual ALS 52401 High Speed Counter for Alspa C80 35 PLC User s Manual ALS 52402 Programmable Coprocessor Module PCM and Support Software for Alspa 8000 PLCs User s Manual ALS 52403 Axis Positioning Module APM for Alspa C80 35 PLC Standard Mode User s Manual ALS 52501 N80 Communications Module for Alspa C80 35 PLC User s Manual ALS 52506 Serial communication modules for Alspa 8000 PLCs User s Manual ALS 52511 Alspa C80 35 PLC Bus Controller for Alspa N80 Network NBC User s Manual ALS 52604 Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual ALS
106. 1 I ISRCH_ INT AI001 AR FD LEN 100016 AQ001 NX NX AQ001 00005 CONST IN 000001 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual 4 81 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 8 CONVERSION FUNCTIONS Use the conversion functions to convert a data item from one number type to another Many programming instructions such as math functions must be used with data of one type This paragraph describes the following conversion functions Abbreviation Function Description Page BCD 4 Convert to BCD 4 Convert a signed integer to 4 digit BCD format 4 82 INT Convert to Signed Integer Convert BCD 4 or REAL to signed integer format Ct DINT Convert to Double Precision Convert REAL to double precision signed integer format ts Signed Integer REAL Convert to REAL Convert INT DINT BCD 4 or WORD to REAL 7286 WORD Convert to WORD Convert REAL to WORD format 2 87 TRUN Truncate Round the real number toward zero 288 8 1 BCD 4 INT The Convert to BCD 4 function is used to output the 4 digit BCD equivalent of signed integer data The original data is not changed by this function The output data can be used directly as input for another program function Data can be converted to BCD format to drive BCD encoded LED displays or presets to external devices such as
107. 1 BIT SEQ CLEAR LEN DIRECT 00008 I I IDIR CONST 580001 ST 00003 580010 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual 4 71 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 6 6 COMMREQ Use the Communication Request COMMREQ function if the program needs to communicate with an intelligent module such as an N80 Communications Module or a Programmable Coprocessor Module The information presented on the following pages shows the format of the COMMREQ function You will need additional information to program the COMMREQ for each type of device Programming requirements for each module that uses the COMMREQ function are described in the module s documentation The COMMREQ function has three input parameters and one output parameter When the COMMREQ function receives power flow a command block of data is sent to the intelligent module The command block begins at the reference specified using the parameter IN The rack and slot number of the intelligent module is specified in SYSID The COMMREQ may either send a message and wait for a reply or send a message and continue without waiting for a reply If the command block specifies that the program will not wait for a reply the command block contents are sent to the receiving device and the program execution resumes imm
108. 1 Size Control Call a Subroutine 155 93 116 85 41 0 0 0 7 309 278 355 177 38 1 0 0 12 PID ISA Algorithm 1870 1827 2311 929 91 56 71 30 15 PID IND Algorithm 2047 2007 2529 1017 91 56 71 30 15 End Instruction Service Request 6 93 54 68 45 41 2 0 0 9 7 37 363 161 2 0 0 9 7 Set 37 363 161 2 0 0 9 14 447 418 599 244 41 2 0 0 9 15 281 243 305 139 41 2 0 0 9 16 131 104 131 69 41 2 0 0 9 18 56 365 180 2 0 0 9 23 1689 1663 2110 939 43 1 0 0 9 26 30 1268 1354 8774 3538 42 0 0 0 9 29 58 41 1 0 9 Nested MCR ENDMCR 135 73 88 39 75 25 28 12 8 Combined A 4 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Table 1 Instruction Timing Continued Instruction Timing Function Enabled Disabled Increment Group Function 351 352 351 352 351 352 Size Timers On Delay Timer 4 4 15 Timer 2 3 15 Off Delay Timer 2 2 15 Counters Up Counter 2 2 13 Down Counter 2 2 13 Math Addition INT 1 0 13 Addition DINT 2 0 19 Addition REAL 352 only 33 0 17 Subtraction INT 1 0 13 Subtraction DINT 2 0 19 Subtraction REAL 352 only 34 0 17 Multiplication INT 21 0 13 Multiplication DINT 24 0 19 Multiplication REAL 352 only 38 1 17 Division INT 22 0 13 Division DINT 25 0 19 Division REAL 352 only 36 2 17 Modulo Division INT 21 0 13 Modulo Div DINT 25 0 19 Square Root INT 41
109. 1T OR 4 47 Output references discrete 2 19 Output register references analog 2 187 Output scan 2 87 OV 2 27 Overrides 2 2 OVR 2 27 P Password access failure 3 Passwords 2 3 5 2 21 PCM communications with the PLC 2 0 Periodic subroutines 2 137 PID 4 127 PLC CPU system software failure 3 17 PLC fault table 3 77 3 6 JL CTRL F for hexadecimal display of fault 3 error codes B explanations 3 fault action A fault extra data B fault group B fault time stamp B hexadecimal display of fault information B 3 B interpreting a fault B long short indicator B rack slot spare B task B f PLC sweep 2 application program logic scan a constant sweep time mode 2 1 3 housekeeping 2 4 input scan 2 logic program checksum calculation 2 7 ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Index logic solution 2 87 output scan 2 PCM communications with the PLC 2 1 programmer communications window scan time contributions 2 scan time contributions for 351 CPUs 2 4 7 standard program sweep mode standard program sweep variations Z 1T STOP mode 2 1 sweep time calculation 2 sweep time contribution 2 system communications window 2 1T PLC system operation 2 0 2 27 Positive tran
110. 2 19 DINT 41 1 2 27 22 37 0 1 41 19 WORD 37 0 1 52 19 Search Less Than Equal INT 38 0 1 48 19 DINT 40 1 2 30 22 BYTE 37 0 1 24 19 WORD 38 0 1 48 19 Conversion Convert to INT 19 1 10 Convert to BCD 4 21 1 10 Convert to REAL 352 only 21 0 8 Convert to WORD 352 only 30 1 11 Truncate to INT 352 only 32 0 11 Truncate to DINT 352 only 31 0 11 ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 7 Instruction Timing Table A 1 Instruction Timing Continued Function Enabled Disabled Increment Group Function 351352 350352 350352 Size Control Call a Subroutine 40 1 7 123 1 13 PID ISA Algorithm 162 34 16 PID IND Algorithm 146 34 16 End Instruction Service Request 6 22 1 10 7 Read 75 1 10 7 Set 75 1 10 14 121 1 10 15 46 1 10 16 36 1 10 18 261 1 10 23 426 0 10 26 30 2910 1 10 29 20 0 10 Nested MCR ENDMCR 1 1 4 Combined COMM REQ 732 0 13 The PID times shown above are based on the 6 5 release of the 351 CPU Service request 26 30 was measured using a high speed counter 16 point output in a 5 slot rack Notes 1 Time in microseconds is based on Release 7 of Alspa P8 25 35 05 software for Model 351 CPUs 2 Fortable functions increment is in units of length specified for bit operation functions microseconds bit for data move functions microseconds number of bits or
111. 3 0 housekeeping 2 87 input scan 2 logic program checksum calculation 2 9 logic solution 2 0 output scan 2 PCM communications with the PLC 2 1 programmer communications window scan time contributions 2 scan time contributions for 351 CPUs 2 6 standard program sweep mode d standard program sweep variations Z 1T STOP mode 2 1 sweep time calculation 2 sweep time contribution 2 system communications window 2 Wr SY FLL 2 27 SY FULL 2 277 SY PRES 2 27 System communications window 2 1 System configuration mismatch 3 11 System operation 2 Alspa C80 05 PLC system 2 3 Alspa C80 25 PLC I O system 2 3 Alspa C80 35 PLC I O system 2 3 clocks and timers 2 2 PLC sweep summary 2 power up and power down sequences 2 2 program organization and user references data 2 117 system security 2 3 System references 3 T System register references 2 13 System status references 2 19512 2 ADD IOM 2 2 tj ADD 810 2 2 OFF 2 2 2 2 ANY FLT 2 2 APL FLT 2 2 BAD PWD 2 BAD RAM 2 2 CFG MM 2 2 FST SCN 2 2 HRD CPU 2 HRD FLT 2 23 ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Index 15 Index SIO 2 21 IO FLT 2 2 IO FULL nau IO PRES 2 2 LOS IOM 2 2 LOS SIO 2 2 LOW BAT 2 LST SCN 2 22 OV SWP 2 2 OVR PRE 2 PB SUM 2 2 PLC BAT 2 2 PRG
112. 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 37 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 4 2 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow enable 11 12 IN Q e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Valid reference for INT or WORD data only not valid for DINT t Constants are limited to integer values for double precision signed integer operations Example 1 In the following example 1001 is checked to be within a range specified by two constants 0 and 100 EE 1510001 RANGE INT 500001 100 1 QC 0 L2 AI001 IN RANGE Truth Table Enable State L1 Value L2 Value IN Value Q State 10001 Constant Constant A1001 Q0001 ON 100 0 lt 0 OFF ON 100 0 0 100 ON ON 100 0 100 OFF OFF 100 0 Not Applicable OFF Page 4 38 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Example 2 In this example AI001 is checked to be within a range specified by two register values LLL 510001 RANGE INT Q0001 5 0001 1 150002 12 AI001 IN RANGE Truth Table Enable State L1 Value L2 Value IN Value Q State 10001 R0001 RO002 1001 200001 500 0 lt 0 500 0 0 500 ON ON 500 0 gt 500 OFF OFF 500 0 Not Applicable
113. 40K Bytes 190KBytes User MegaBasic Program ALS 52402 IC693ADC311 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor ALS 52604 IC693BEM334 N80 bus Controller ALS 52511 IC693CMM304 N80 Communications Module for Alspa 80 35 ALS 52501 IC693CMM305 Enhanced N80 Communications Module for Alspa 35 ALS 52502 1C693APU301 Axis Positioning Module 1 Axis Follower Mode ALS 52607 IC693APU301 Axis Positioning Module 1 Axis Standard Mode ALS 52403 1C693APU302 Axis Positioning Module 2 Axis Follower Mode ALS 52607 IC693APU302 Axis Positioning Module 2 Axis Standard Mode ALS 52403 1C693APU305 I O Processor ALS 52309 IC693CMM221 Ethernet Communications ALS 52512 6 2 Data Formats Discrete inputs and discrete outputs are stored as bits in bit cache status table memory Analog input and analog output data are stored as words and are memory resident in a portion of application RAM memory allocated for that purpose 6 3 Default Conditions for Model 35 Output Modules At power up Model 35 discrete output modules default to outputs off They will retain this default condition until the first output scan from the PLC Analog output modules can be configured with a jumper located on the module s removable terminal block to either default to zero or retain their last state Also analog output modules may be powered from an external power source so that
114. 693MDL734 6 125 VDC Positive Negative Logic 2A ALS 52118 IC693MDL740 16 12 24 VDC Positive Logic 0 5A ALS 52118 IC693MDL741 16 12 24 VDC Negative Logic 0 5A ALS 52118 IC693MDL742 16 12 24 VDC Positive Logic 1A ALS 52118 IC693MDL752 32 5 24 VDC TTL Negative Logic 0 5A ALS 52118 IC693MDL753 32 12 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic 0 5A ALS 52118 IC693MDL930 8 Relay N O 4A Isolated ALS 52118 IC693MDL931 8 Relay BC Isolated ALS 52118 IC693MDL940 16 Relay N O 2A ALS 52118 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 35 System Operation Input Output Modules IC693MDR390 8 8 24 VDC Input Relay Output ALS 52118 IC693MAR590 8 8 120 VAC Input Relay Output ALS 52118 Analog Modules IC693ALG220 4ch Analog Input Voltage ALS 52118 IC693ALG221 4ch Analog Input Current ALS 52118 IC693ALG222 16 Analog Input Voltage ALS 52118 1C693ALG223 16 Analog Input Current ALS 52118 IC693ALG390 2ch Analog Output Voltage ALS 52118 IC693ALG391 2ch Analog Output Current ALS 52118 IC693ALG392 Analog Output Current Voltage ALS 52118 IC693ALG442 4 2 Analog Current Voltage Combination Input Output ALS 52118 Option Modules IC693APU300 High Speed Counter ALS 52401 IC693CMM311 Communications Coprocessor Module ALS 52506 IC693PCM301 PCM 192K Bytes 47KBytes User MegaBasic Program ALS 52402 IC693PCM311 PCM 6
115. ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 91 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 92 The DO I O DOIO function is used to update inputs or outputs for one scan while the program is running The DOIO function can also be used to update selected I O during the program in addition to the normal I O scan If input references are specified the function allows the most recent values of inputs to be obtained for program logic If output references are specified DO I O updates outputs based on the most current values stored in I O memory I O is serviced in increments of entire I O modules the PLC adjusts the references if necessary while the function executes The DOIO function has four input parameters and one output parameter When the function receives power flow and input references are specified the input points at the starting reference ST and ending at END are scanned If areference is specified for ALT a copy of the new input values is placed in memory beginning at that reference and the real input points are not updated ALT must be the same size as the reference type scanned If a discrete reference is used for ST and END then ALT must also be discrete If no reference is specified for ALT the real input points are updated When the DOIO function receives power flow and output references are specified the output points at the starting reference ST and ending at END are written
116. APPENDIX USING FLOATING POINT NUMBERS E 1 1 FLOATING POINT NUMBERS E I 2 VALUES OF FLOATING POINT NUMBERS E 277 3 ERRORS IN FLOATING POINT NUMBERS AND OPERATIONS 4 4 ENTERING AND DISPLAYING FLOATING POINT NUMBERS 18 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Figures Figure 2 J PLCS Weep cbs Deke ee EU wesw eens Doce 2 4 Figure 2 2 Programmer Communications Window Flow Chart 2 4 Figure 2 3 System Communications Flow 2 10 Figure 2 4 PCM Communications with the PLC 2 7 Figure 2 5 Power Up Sequence 2 28 Figure 2 6 Time Tick Contact Timing Diagram 2 30 Figure 2 7 Alspa 35 I O Structure 2 3 Figure 4 1 Independent Term Algorithm PIDIND 4 137 ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 19 Tables Table 2 1 Sweep Time 2 4 Table 2 2 I O Scan
117. Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 c en First issue 07 93 This edition 06 97 Meaning of terms that be used in this document Notice to readers WARNING Warning notices are used to emphasize that hazardous voltages currents temperatures or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist or may be associated with use of a particular equipment In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment a Warning notice is used Caution notices are used where there is a risk of damage to equipment for example Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment This document is based on information available at the time of its publication While efforts have been made to be accurate the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation operation or maintenance Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems Cegelec assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made Cegelec makes no representation or warranty expressed implied or statutory with respect to and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy completeness sufficiency or usefulness of th
118. C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Example In the following example whenever input 9610001 is set the integer content of R0002 is decremented by 1 and coil 00001 is turned on provided there is no overflow in the subtraction 1510001 500001 1 1 1 1 SUB aC RO002 I1 580002 0095 00001 CONST I2 3 1 3 Math Functions and Data Types Function Operation Displays as ADD INT Q 16 bit 11 16 bit I2 16 bit 5 digit base 10 number with sign ADD DINT Q 32 bit I1 32 bit I2 32 bit 8 digit base 10 number with sign ADD REAL Q 32 bit I1 32 bit I2 32 bit 7 digit base 10 number sign and decimal SUB INT Q 16 bit I1 16 bit I2 16 bit 5 digit base 10 number with sign SUB DINT Q 32 bit 2 I1 32 bit I2 32 bit 8 digit base 10 number with sign SUB REAL Q 32 bit I1 32 bit I2 32 bit 7 digit base 10 number sign and decimal MUL INT Q 16 bit I1 16 bit I2 16 bit 5 digit base 10 number with sign MUL DINT Q 32 bit I1 32 bit I2 32 bit 8 digit base 10 number with sign MUL REAL Q 32 bit I1 32 bit I2 32 bit 7 digit base 10 number sign and decimal DIV INT Q 16 bit I1 16 bit I2 16 bit 5 digit base 10 number with sign DIV DINT Q 32 bit 2 I1 32 bit I2 32 bit 8 digit base 10 number with sign DIV
119. CN 1 1 BLKMv INT CONST IN1 Q 80010 32767 CONST IN2 32768 CONST IN3 400001 400002 CONST 5 00002 CONST ING 00001 CONST IN7 00001 CONST IN4 4 64 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 6 3 BLKCLR WORD Use the Block Clear BLKCLR function to fill a specified block of data with zeros The BLKCLR function has two input parameters and one output parameter When the function receives power flow it writes zeros into the memory location beginning at the reference specified by IN When the data to be cleared is from discrete memory I Q M G or T the transition information associated with the references is also cleared The function passes power to the right whenever power is received enable ok word to be cleared IN LEN 100001 6 3 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the array is cleared IN IN contains the first word of the array to be cleared ok The ok output is energized whenever the function is enabled LEN LEN must be between 1 and 256 words 6 3 2 Valid Memory Types
120. DD INT function being placed in the hold new count for set parameter The second service request block requests the PLC to set the new word count FST SCN 1 1 XOR MOVE INT INT 280150 I1 0 580150 CONST IN 280152 510137 1 1 CONST FNC 00006 00006 380150 PARM CONST 12 00001 LEN 100001 80150 I2 5 _ ADD INT REQ 380151 11 380153 CONST FNC 380152 PARM 00016 The example parameter blocks are located at address RO150 They have the following content Page 4 108 0 read current count RO150 hold current count R0151 1 set current count RO152 hold new count for set RO153 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 9 4 SVCREQ 7 Change Read Time of Day Clock Use the SVCREQ function with function number 7 in order to read and set the time of day clock in the PLC This function is available only in 331 or higher CPUs Successful execution will occur unless 1 Some number other than 0 or 1 is entered as the requested operation see below 2 An invalid data format is specified 3 The data provided is not in the expected format For the date time functions the leng
121. DINT The Truncate function is used to round the real number toward zero The original data is not changed by this function The output data can be used directly as input for another program function The 352 CPUs are the only C80 35 CPUs with floating point capability therefore the TRUN function has no applicability for other C80 35 CPUs When the function receives power flow it performs the conversion making the result available via output Q The function passes power flow when power is received unless the specified conversion would result in a value that is out of range or unless IN is NaN Not a Number enable TRUN_ INT value to be converted IN 0 output parameter 0 Page 4 88 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 8 6 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the conversion is performed IN IN contains a reference for the real value to be truncated ok The ok output is energized when the function is performed without error unless the value is out of range or IN is NaN Q Q contains the truncated INT or DINT value of the original value in IN It is possible for a loss of precision to occur when converting from REAL to DINT since the REAL has 24 significant bits 8 6 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flo
122. DIS PID IND Algorithm amp PIDIN End amp END Rung Explanation amp COMME System Services Request amp SV Master Control Relay amp MCR End Master Control Relay amp ENDMCR Nested Master Control Relay amp MCRN Nested End Master Cntl Relay amp ENDMCR Jump N amp JUMP Nested Jump amp JUMP amp JUMPN Label amp JUMPN amp LABEL Nested Label amp LABEL amp LABELN amp LABELN Page 2 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Appendix Key Functions D This appendix lists the keyboard functions that are active in the software environment This information may also be displayed on the programmer screen by pressing ALT K to access key help Key Sequence Description Key Sequence Description Keys Available Throughout the Software Package ALT A Abort CTRL Break Exit package ALT C Clear field Esc Zoom out ALT M Change Programmer mode CTRL Home Previous command line contents ALT R Change PLC Run Stop state CTRL End Next command line contents ALT E Toggle status area CTRL lt Cursor left within the field ALT J Toggle command line CTRL Cursor right within the field ALT L List directory files CTRL D Decrementreference address ALT P Printscreen CTRL U Incrementreference address ALT H Help Tab Change increment field contents ALT K Key help Shift Tab Change decrement field contents ALT I Instruction mnemonic help Enter Accept field conten
123. DWL DO_DWL REL i DWELL E I DWELL 0 15 CONST PV 00005 TMRID Page 4 14 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 2 4 OFDT The off delay timer OFDT increments while power flow is off and resets to zero when power flow is on Time may be counted in tenths of a second the default selection hundredths of a second or thousandths of a second The range is 0 to 32767 time units The state of this timer is retentive on power failure no automatic initialization occurs at power up When the OFDT first receives power flow it passes power to the right and the current value CV is set to zero The OFDT uses word 1 register as its CV storage location see the Parameters paragraph on the next page for additional information The output remains on as long as the function receives power flow If the function stops receiving power flow from the left it continues to pass power to the right and the timer starts accumulating time in the current value Note If multiple occurrences of the same timer with the same reference address are enabled during a CPU sweep the current values of the timers will be the same The OFDT does not pass power flow if the preset value is zero or negative Each time the function is invoked with the enabling logic set to OFF the current value is updated to ref
124. DWORD Page 2 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Function Group Data Move Table Conver sion Function Move INT Move BIT Move WORD Block Move INT Block Move WORD Block Clear Shift Register BIT Shift Register WORD Bit Sequencer COMM REQ Array Move INT DINT BIT BYTE WORD Search Equal Convert to INT Convert to BCD 4 ALS 52102 Table Instruction Timing Continued 311 94 67 76 76 56 201 103 165 1317 230 231 290 228 230 197 206 197 198 201 179 198 198 206 181 198 197 205 197 199 206 181 199 200 207 200 74 Enabled 313 331 341 311 SS e 37 20 43 62 77 35 42 37 49 20 41 48 61 28 59 48 62 29 59 28 33 14 43 153 192 79 85 53 67 29 73 101 127 53 96 1272 1577 884 41 201 254 104 72 202 260 105 74 261 329 135 74 198 252 104 74 201 254 104 72 158 199 82 78 166 209 87 79 141 177 74 78 158 199 82 78 159 200 83 79 163 204 84 79 141 178 73 79 159 200 83 79 160 200 82 79 167 210 88 78 143 178 73 79 160 200 82 79 160 200 83 77 167 210 87 80 142 178 15 79 160 200 83 77 159 201 84 78 168 210 87 79 143 178 75 80 159 201 84 78 158 200 82 79 167 209 88 78 143 178 74 78 158 200 82 79 46 57 25 42 50 60 25 42 Disabled 313 331 341 0 TT 0 0 0 0 1 0 30 34 16 29 35 15 0 0 0 36 43 18 25 29 12 31 37 16 2 0 41 49 2
125. F to display hexadecimal fault information 3 8 B 3 P 17 error codes explanations and correction 3 T external I O failures 3 7 fault action 3 hexadecimal display of fault information B T O fault dd B T O fault group B 1 I O fault table 3 I O fault table explanations 3 1 7 internal failures 3 1 Index 10 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual interpreting a fault B loss of module 3 1 loss of or missing option module 3 10 low battery signal 3 pal no user program present 3 operational failures 3 option module software failure 3 1T password access failure 3 1 PLC CPU system software failure 3 1 PLC fault action B PLC fault group B PLC fault table 3 3 9 PLC fault table explanations program block checksum failure 1F references 3 reset of addition of or extra option module 3 1 system configuration mismatch 3 1F system reaction to faults 3 11 Faults interpreting B f Flash protection on 351 and 352 CPUs 2 17 Floating point numbers E entering and displaying floating point numbers errors in floating point numbers and operations E internal format of floating point numbers E values of floating point numbers E T FST SCN 2 2 Function block parameters 2 27 Function block structure 2 24 1 coil check feature 2 2 format of program function blocks 2 4
126. FFFFh Real multiplication error value in hex NaN_DIV 7F83FFFFh Real division error value in hex NaN_SQRT 7F84FFFFh Real square root error value in hex NaN_LOG 7F85FFFFh Real logarithm error value in hex NaN POWO TF86FFFFh Real exponent error value in hex NaN SIN 7F87FFFFh Real sine error value in hex NaN COS TF88FFFFh Real cosine error value in hex NaN TAN 7F89FFFFh Real tangent error value in hex NaN ASIN 7F8AFFFFh Real inverse sine error value in hex NaN_ACOS 7F8BFFFFh Real inverse cosine error value in hex NaN_BCD 7F8CFFFFh BCD 4 to real error REAL_INDEF 00000 Real indefinite divide 0 by 0 error When an NaN result is fed into another function it passes through to the result For example if an NaN_ADD is the first operand to the SUB_REAL function the result of the SUB_REAL is NaN_ADD If both operands to a function are NaNs the first operand will pass through Because of this feature of propagating NaNs through functions you can identify the function where the NaN originated For NaN the ok output is OFF not energized Page E 4 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Using Floating Point Numbers 4 ENTERING AND DISPLAYING FLOATING POINT NUMBERS In the mantissa up to six or seven significant digits of precision may be entered and stored however Alspa P8 software will display only the first six of these
127. INT 78 51 61 27 41 0 0 0 13 Modulo Div DINT 134 103 130 54 41 1 0 0 13 Square Root INT 153 124 155 65 42 0 0 0 9 Square Root DINT 268 239 299 120 42 0 1 1 9 Relational Equal INT 66 35 44 19 41 1 1 0 9 Equal DINT 86 56 68 29 41 1 1 0 9 Not Equal INT 67 39 48 22 41 1 1 0 9 Not Equal DINT 81 51 65 28 41 1 1 0 9 Greater Than INT 64 33 42 20 41 1 1 0 9 Greater Than DINT 89 59 73 32 41 1 1 0 9 Greater Than Eq INT 64 36 42 19 41 1 1 0 9 Greater Than Eq DINT 87 58 73 30 41 1 1 0 9 Less Than INT 66 35 44 19 41 1 1 0 9 Less Than DINT 87 57 70 30 41 1 1 0 9 Less Than Equal INT 66 36 44 21 41 1 1 0 9 Less Than Equal DINT 86 57 70 31 41 1 1 0 9 Range INT 92 58 66 29 46 1 0 1 15 Range DINT 106 75 84 37 45 0 0 0 15 Range WORD 93 60 67 29 0 0 0 0 15 Bit Logical AND 67 37 48 22 42 0 0 1 13 Operation Logical OR 68 38 48 21 42 0 0 1 13 Logical Exclusive OR 66 38 47 20 42 0 0 1 13 Logical Invert NOT 62 32 40 17 42 0 0 1 9 Shift Bit Left 139 89 111 47 74 26 30 13 11 61 11 61 15 05 6 29 15 Shift Bit Right 135 87 107 45 75 26 30 13 11 63 11 62 15 07 6 33 15 Rotate Bit Left 156 127 158 65 42 1 0 0 11 70 11 78 15 18 6 33 15 Rotate Bit Right 146 116 147 62 42 1 0 0 11 74 11 74 15 23 6 27 15 Bit Position 102 72 126 38 42 1 153 0 13 Bit Clear 68 38 34 21 42 1 33 1 13 Bit Test 79 49 132 28 41 0 126 1 13 Bit Set 67 37 0 20 42 0 36 0 13 Masked Compare 217 154 177 74 107 44 50 21 25 WORD Masked Compare 232 169 195 83 108 44 49 22 25
128. LS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 7 System Operation 1 1 3 Housekeeping The housekeeping portion of the sweep performs all of the tasks necessary to prepare for the start of the sweep If the PLC is in Constant Sweep mode the sweep is delayed until the required sweep time elapses If the required time has already elapsed the OV SWP SA0002 contact is set and the sweep continues without delay Next timer values hundredths tenths and seconds are updated by calculating the difference from the start of the previous sweep and the new sweep time In order not to lose accuracy the actual start of sweep is recorded in 100 microsecond increments Each timer has a remainder field which contains the number of 100 microsecond increments that have occurred since the last time the timer value was incremented 1 1 4 Input Scan Scanning of inputs occurs during the input scan portion of the sweep just prior to the logic solution During this part of the sweep all Model 35 input modules are scanned and their data stored in I discrete inputs or AI analog inputs memory as appropriate Any global data received by an N80 Communications Module is stored in G memory The Alspa 80 25 and Micro input scan includes discrete inputs only Modules are scanned in ascending reference address order starting with the N80 Communications Module then discrete input modules and finally analog input module
129. M Example 2 In the next example the PLC is shut down when any fault occurs on an I O module except when the fault occurs on modules in rack 0 slot 9 and in rack 1 slot 9 If faults occur on these two modules the system remains running The parameter for table type is set up on the first sweep The contact PRES when set indicates that the I O fault table contains an entry The PLC CPU sets the normally open contact in the sweep after the fault logic places a fault in the table If faults are placed in the table in two consecutive sweeps the normally open contact is set for two consecutive sweeps The example uses a parameter block located at RO0600 After the SVCREQ function executes the fourth fifth and sixth words of the parameter block contain the address of the I O module that faulted RO0600 long short 00601 referenceaddress 00602 rack number slot number RO0603 bus no bus address RO0604 point address fault data 00605 4 116 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set In the program the EQ INT blocks compare the rack slot address in the table to hexadecimal constants The internal coil 00007 is turned on when the rack slot where the fault occurred meets the criteria specified above If M00007 is on its normally closed contact is off preventing the shutdown Conversely if 00007 is off because the
130. M programmer ADS etc to references used on positive transition coils since it will destroy the one shot nature of these coils Transitional coils can be used with references from either retentive non retentive memory Q 90M T G PSA SB or 905 1 10 Negative Transition Coil If the reference associated with this coil is OFF when the coil stops receiving power flow the reference is set to ON until the next time the coil is executed Do not write from external devices to references used on negative transition coils since it will destroy the one shot nature of these coils Transitional coils can be used with references from either retentive or non retentive memory 96Q 96M T G PSA SB or 8 Example In the following example when reference E1 goes from OFF to ON coils E2 and receive power flow turning E2 ON for one logic sweep When El goes from ON to OFF power flow is removed from E2 and turning coil E3 ON for one sweep 1 11 SET Coil S SET and RESET are non retentive coils that can be used to keep latch the state of a reference e g E1 either ON or OFF When a SET coil receives power flow its reference stays ON whether or not the coil itself receives power flow until the reference is reset by another coil SET coils write an undefined result to the transition bit for the given reference Refer to the information on Transitions and Overrides in cha
131. P ON Toggle Key YES PLC goes to STOP IO Switch from ON RUN to OFF STOP X Has no effect regardless of setting Page 2 14 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 System Operation 2 PROGRAM ORGANIZATION AND USER REFERENCES DATA The total logic size for the Alspa 80 35 programmable controller can be up to 6 KB in size for a Model 311 or Model 313 CPU up to 16 KB in size for a Model 331 and up to 80 KB for Model 341 or Model 351 and 352 CPUs A program for the Alspa C80 25 programmable controller can be up to 2 KB in size for a Model 211 CPU A program for the Alspa 8000 Micro programmable controller can be up to 6 KB in size up to 12 Kb for a 28 point 80 05 Micro PLC The user program contains logic that is used when it is started up The maximum number of rungs allowed per logic block main or subroutine is 3000 The logic is executed repeatedly by the PLC inputs outputs Refer to either the ALS 52117 Alspa C60 35 PLC Installation Manual for a listing of program sizes and reference limits for each model CPU programs begin with a variable declaration table This table lists the nicknames and reference descriptions that have been assigned in the user program The block declaration editor lists subroutine blocks declared in the main program 2 1 Subroutine Blocks Alspa C80 35 PLC only A program can call subroutine blocks as it executes A subroutine must
132. Q Stop Teach mode ALT n Playback file n n 0 thru 9 CTRL Break Exit package Esc Zoom out CTRL Home Previous command line CTRL End Next command line CTRL lt Cursor left within the field CTRL Cursor right within the field CTRL D Decrementreference address CTRL U Incrementreference address Tab Change increment field contents Shift Tab Change decrement field contents Enter Accept field contents CTRL E Display last system error F12 or Keypad Toggle discrete reference F11 or Keypad Override discretereference Page D 2 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Key Functions Alspa P8 Key Help ALT K Key Sequence Description Keys Available in the Program Editor Only ALTB Toggetexteditorbell ALT D Delete rung element ALT S Store block to PLC and disk ALT X Display zoom level ALT N Toggle nickname reference address ALT U Update disk ALT V Variable table window Keypad Accept rung Enter Accept rung CTRL PgUp Previous rung CTRL PgDn Next rung Horizontal shunt Vertical shunt Tab Go to the next operand field Special Keys ALT O T Password override Available only on the Password screen in the configuration software ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page D 3 Key Functions Instruction he lt gt
133. Ra PESCE ae TE II I ES 4 2 3 3 2 Valid Memory Types sues Exe D RO IERI NE or age 4 3 3 4 Trig Function SIN COS TAN ASIN ACOS 58 Parametets 4 3 3 4 2 Valid Memory Types s cos sere ce E 4 3 3 5 Logarithmic Exponential Functions LOG LN EXP EXPT fe 3 54 Paramelets s 2a 2d e a HR Aaah b o BASE Gee 4 3 3 3 2 Walid Memory TY Pes is uus UE che coe 4 3 3 6 Radian Conversion RAD DEG 4 3 3 6 1 Parametetsi Pd aaa a RS 4 3 3 62 Valid Memory io ks suh as ei 4 3 4 RELATIONAL 5 4 33 4 1 Comparisons 1 1 ad Ree BG bd 4 3 Parameters Rc eue ete ecd Rete todo ee Rede 4 3 4 1 2 Valid Memory Types s reis sec ee enian HER EE 4 3 42 RANGE INT DINT WORD DWORD 4 3 21 Parameters suo oe Poe E RS pce e LaL ADR IER US ER Ie 4 3 4 2 2 Valid Memory ene dert tek cto Pos RR Po e RR 4 3 5 OPERATION FUNCTIONS 4 44 5 1 ANDandOR
134. S 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 3 3 Fault Explanations and Correction 1 3 2 Fault Action Two fault tables are provided to make faults easier to find and to keep a single table from becoming too long These tables are the PLC fault table and the I O fault table Fatal faults cause the fault to be recorded in the appropriate table any diagnostic variables to be set and the system to be halted Diagnostic faults are recorded in the appropriate table and any diagnostic variables are set Informational faults are only recorded in the appropriate table Possible fault actions are listed in the following table Table 3 2 Fault Actions Fault Action Response by CPU Fatal Log fault in fault table Set fault references Go to STOP mode Diagnostic Log fault in fault table Set fault references Informational Log fault in fault table When a fault is detected the CPU uses the fault action for that fault Fault actions are not configurable in the Alspa 80 35 80 25 or Micro PLC 1 4 Fault References Fault references in Alspa 80 35 25 and Micro PLCs are of one type fault summary references Fault summary references are set to indicate what fault occurred The fault reference remains on until the PLC is cleared or until cleared by the application program An example of a fault bit being set and then clearing the bit is shown in the following
135. TOP or RUN mode 1 Steps 2 through 6 above do not apply to the 80 05 Micro PLC For information about the power up and power down sequences for the Micro refer to the Power up and Power down Sequences of Chapter 5 in the ALS 52119 Alspa C80 05 Micro PLC User s Manual 2 The first part of this chart on the Figure 2 5 does not apply to the 80 05 Micro PLC For information about the power up and power down sequences for the Micro refer to the Power up and Power down Sequences of Chapter 5 ALS 52119 Alspa C80 05 Micro PLC User s Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 27 System Operation a43068 FALSE TRUE PROM PUE FALSE PROM RON T amp S O FALSE FALSE PROM RAM gt FALSE COPY ROM TO RAI lt gt FALSE CLEAR RAM TRUE TRU Figure 2 5 Power Up Sequence clear Press CLR and M T using HHP ld not Press LD and NOT using HHP rom sum ROM checksum is good ostop Press NOT and RUN using HHP prom_rom Run from ROM parameter in ROM pstop Power in STOP mode ram_sum RAM checksum is good prun Power up in RUN mode prom_ram Run from ROM parameter in RAM bal Battery voltage is low pdsm power down STOP mode f a PROM is not present rom sum false and prom ram false Page 2 28 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Syste
136. Task State and Number of Words to Checksum 7 Change Read Time of Day Clock 13 Shut Down the PLC 14 Clear Fault Tables 15 Read Last Logged Fault Table Entry 16 Read Elapsed Time Clock 18 Read I O Override Status 23 Read Master Checksum 26 30 Interrogate I O 29 Read Elapsed Power Down Time Page 4 104 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set The SVCREQ function has three input parameters and one output parameter When the SVCREQ receives power flow the PLC is requested to perform the function FNC indicated Parameters for the function begin at the reference given for PARM The SVCREQ function passes power flow unless an incorrect function number incorrect parameters out of range references are specified Additional causes for failure are described on the pages that follow The reference given for PARM may represent any type of word memory R AI or AQ This reference is the first of a group that make up the parameter block for the function Successive 16 bit locations store additional parameters The total number of references required will depend on the type of SVCREQ function being used Parameter blocks may be used as both inputs for the function and the location where data may be output after the function executes Therefore data returned by the function is accessed at the same location specified for PARM 1
137. The valid values for input NX are 0 to LEN 1 NX should be set to zero to begin searching at the first element This value increments by one at the time of execution Therefore the values of output NX are 1 to LEN If the value of input NX is out of range lt 0 or LEN its value is set to the default value of zero enable Era EO INT starting address AR FD LEN 100001 input index NX NX output index object of search IN 7 2 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed 1 AR contains the starting address of the array to be searched 1 InputNX Input NX contains the index into the array at which to begin the search IN INcomumstheobjctoftheseamh Output NX Output NX holds the position within the array of the search FD FD indicates that an array element has been found and the function was successful LEN LEN specifies the number of elements starting at AR that make up the array to be searched It may be 1 to 32767 bytes or words 7 2 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow T AQ const enable IN NX out FD Valid reference or place where power flow through the function Valid reference for INT BYTE or WORD data only not valid for DINT Valid reference for BYTE or WORD data only not valid for INT
138. Time Contribution for Alspa 80 35 Modules in milliseconds 2 1 Table 2 3 Scan Time Contribution for Alspa C80 35 351 352 Module in milliseconds 2 07 Table 2 4 Example Sweep Time Calculation for an Alspa C80 35 Model 331 PLC 2 0 Table 2 5 Register References 2 137 Table 2 6 Discrete References RARO UE ROO VA RR Gh eaves ein CARRS 2 19 Table 2 7 Data Types T bs 2 217 Table 2 8 System Status 5 2 237 Table 2 8 System Status References Continued 2237 Table 2 9 Model 55 VO Modules seb x REA E II A e E A 2 34 Table 2 10 Model 25 I O Modules 2 31 Table 2 11 PLC Models ee S RET EST EE T EE 2307 1 Falt Summary p ote hae EPOR NEN E OPE 3 Table 3 2 Fault ACTIONS eisean e ERRORS 3 4 Table 4 T Types of Contacts sp syo eserse Re ERR ER RERSKI3ESGGESPPLe UP Ua REPE 4 1 Table 4 2 Types Of Cows sic oo str be EATUR e Tem dua se Rep 4 7 Table 4 3 Service Request Functions
139. VE WORD 5 0001 IN Q M0033 LEN 100003 Before using the Move function After using the Move function INPUT 0001 to M0048 INPUT M0033 to MO0080 ome TOT OT aa xe Example 2 In this example whenever 10001 is set the three bits 0001 M0002 0003 are moved 70M0100 MO101 and 0102 respectively Coil 00001 is turned on mE 510001 800001 i p Mowe BIT M0001 IN Q M0100 LEN 100003 4 62 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 6 2 BLKMOV Use the Block Move BLKMOV function to a block of seven constants to a specified location Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set INT WORD REAL The BLKMOV function has eight input parameters and two output parameters When the function receives power flow it copies the constant values into consecutive locations beginning at the destination specified in output Q Output Q cannot be the input of another program function The REAL data type is only available on 352 CPUs For BLKMOV INT the values of INI IN7 are displayed as signed decimals For BLEMOV WORD IN7 are displayed in hexadecimal For BLKMOV REAL INI IN7 are displayed in Real format The function passes power to the right whenever power is received enable
140. a to Another Type Many program functions like the math functions operate on numbers which must be of the same type Use the conversion functions described in chapter 3 Conversion Functions if you need to change a number to word BCD or signed integer format 3 5 Compare Two Numbers To compare two numbers which must be the same type to see whether one is greater than equal to or less than the other use one of the relational functions described in chapter 4 14 Relational Functions 3 6 Manipulate Bit Strings Chapter A 13 Bit Operation Functions contains information about data move and boolean operations on data that is in the form of bit strings 1 To perform boolean operations AND OR NOT two bit strings of the same length 2 Tocreate an output string that is a copy of an input bit string but with its bits inverted shifted or rotated Also use the data move functions to clear an area of memory and fill it with typed data 3 7 Move Data Refer to chapte 4 9 Data Move Functions to create program logic that will 1 Copy data to another location Data is copied as individual bits Move a block of constants into memory Clear an area of discrete or register reference memory Shift data from one memory location to another capturing the data that has been shifted out oi Res 9e Perform a bit sequence shift through an array of bits 3 8 Array Move and Search To search for array value
141. able EENE CO REAL input parameter IN output parameter 0 The TRIG functions only available the model 352 CPU 3 4 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed IN IN contains the constant or reference real value to be operated on ok The ok output is energized when the function is performed without overflow unless an invalid operation occurs and or IN is NaN Q Output Q contains the trigonometric value of IN 3 4 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow 1 PQ M T 8 G R AI AQ const none Pa M r _ _ lt enable IN e e e e ok Q e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Example In the following example the COS of the value R0001 is placed in RO0033 5 REAL ROO01 IN Q RO033 3 141500 1 000000 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 31 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 3 5 Logarithmic Exponential Functions LOG LN EXP EXPT The LOG LN and EXP functions have two input parameters and two output parameters When the function receives power flow it performs the appropriate logarithmic exponential operation on the real value in inp
142. abled the operation is performed T contains a constant or reference forthe first word to be XORed o 12 T2 contains a constant or reference for the second word to be XORed o ok The ok output is energized whenever enable is energized Q Output contains the result of T1 XORed with 12 Page 4 44 Alspa C80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 5 2 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow enable 12 ok Valid reference or place where power flow through the function SA SB or PSC only 905 cannot be used Example In the following example whenever 9610001 is set the bit string represented by the nickname WORD3 is cleared set to all zeros 510001 I I II XOR WORD WORD3 11 WORD3 WORD3 I2 ss Te zwo ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 45 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 5 3 NOT WORD The NOT function is used to set the state of each bit in the output bit string Q to the opposite of the state of the corresponding bit in bit string 11 All bits are altered on each scan that power is received making output string Q the logical complement of I1 The function passes power flow to the right whenever
143. about Model CE693UDD005 refer to the ALS 52119 Alspa C80 05 Micro PLC User s Manual In our effort to improve the quality of Alspa P8 documentation there are clarifications and corrections in several places within this manual In addition to minor clarifications we reorganized and improved the paragraph on Communication Requests beginning on 72 June 1997 Release 7 for software and CPU Math functions chapter 4 trigo logarithmic exponentical radian Real functions floating point only CPU 352 chapter 4 Key switch function chapter 2 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 3 Revisions Page 4 Alspa C80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Preface This manual describes the operation fault handling and Alspa P8 programming instructions for the Alspa C80 35 Alspa C80 25 and Alspa 80 05 Micro programmable controllers The Alspa C80 35 PLC Alspa 80 25 and Alspa 80 05 Micro PLC are members of the Alspa 8000 range of programmable logic controllers from Cegelec 1 CONTENT OF THIS MANUAL This manual contains the following chapters and appendices Chapter 1 Introduction provides an overview of the Alspa 80 35 PLC Alspa C80 25 PLC and Alspa 80 05 Micro and the Alspa P8 25 35 05 instruction set Chapter 2 System Operation describes certain System operations of the Alspa 80 35 PLC Alspa 80 25 PLC or
144. ack calculation When the output is clamped this replaces the accumulated Y term with whatever value is necessary to produce the clamped output exactly When the bit is set to one this replaces the accumulated Y term with the value of the Y term at the start of the calculation In this way the pre clamp Y value is held as long as the output is clamped NOTE The anti reset windup action bit is only available on release 6 50 or later C80 35 CPUs Remember that the bits are set in powers of 2 For example to set Config Word to 0 for default PID configuration you would add 1 to change the Error Term from SP PV to PV SP or add 2 to change the Output Polarity from CV PID Output to CV PID Output or add 4 to change Derivative Action from Error rate of change to PV rate of change etc Manual Thisis an INT value set to the current CV output while the PID block is in Automatic mode When Command the block is switched to Manual mode this value is used to set the CV output and the internal 13 value of the integrator within the Upper and Lower Clamp and Slew Time limits ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 129 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Table 4 5 PID Parameters Details Continued Control Word This is an internal parameter that is normally left at 0 14 If the Override low bit is set to 1 this word and other internal SP PV
145. act Cegelec Field Service giving them all the information contained in the fault entry This second statement means that you must tell Field Service both the information readable directly from the fault table and the hexadecimal information you see when you press CTRL F Field Service personnel will then give you further instructions for the appropriate action to be taken An example of the I O Fault Zoom screen displaying this information is shown below EXIT 0 3 ADD N OF 1 0 MODULE 01 22 05 54 13 00 FF0000 O0037F7FFF7F 0702 OF 00 00 010000000000047EC5080201000000000000000000 Addition of 1 0 Module The PLC operating software generates this error when an 1 0 module which had been faulted returns to operation Corrective Action No action necessary if the module was removed or replaced or the remote rack was power cycled Update the configuration file or remove the module Next Page Down Page 3 8 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Fault Explanations and Correction 2 PLC FAULT TABLE EXPLANATIONS Each fault explanation contains a fault description and instructions to correct the fault Many fault descriptions have multiple causes In these cases the error code displayed with the additional fault information obtained by pressing CTRL F is used to distinguish different fault conditions
146. active the program checksums may not be valid until the store is complete Therefore two flags are provided at the beginning of the output parameter block to indicate when the program and configuration checksums are valid For this function the output parameter block has a length of 12 words with this format Master Program Checksum Valid 0 not valid 1 valid address Master Configuration Checksum Valid 0 not valid 1 valid address 1 Number of Program Blocks including MAIN address 2 Size of User Program in Bytes DWORD data type address 3 Program Additive Checksum address 5 Program CRC Checksum DWORD data type address 6 Size of Configuration Data in Bytes address 8 Configuration Additive Checksum address 9 Configuration CRC Checksum DWORD data type address 10 Example In the following example when input 961025 is ON the master checksum information is placed into the parameter block and the output coil 00001 is turned on The parameter block is located at R0050 10251 500001 Svo CONST FNC 0023 580050 PARM Page 4 120 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 9 11 SVCREQ 26 30 Interrogate I O Use SVCREQ function 26 or 30 they are identical i e you can use either number to accomplish the same thing to interrogate the ac
147. ad this fault is logged As long as this fault is present in the system the controller will not transition to RUN mode This fault is not automatically cleared on power up the user must specifically order the condition to be cleared The fault action for this group is Fatal Correction Clear the fault and retry the download of the program or configuration file ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 3 17 Fault Explanations and Correction 3 FAULT TABLE EXPLANATIONS The I O fault table reports data about faults in three classifications Fault category Fault type Fault description The faults described on the following page have a fault category but do not have a fault type or fault group Each fault explanation contains a fault description and instructions to correct the fault Many fault descriptions have multiple causes In these cases the error code displayed with the additional fault information obtained by pressing CTRL F is used to distinguish different fault conditions sharing the same fault description For more information about using CTRL F refer to appendix B Interpreting Fault Tables Using Alspa 8 25 35 05 Software in this manual The error code is the first two hexadecimal digits in the fifth group of numbers as shown in the following example 01 000000 01030100 0902 0200 000000000000 Error Code first two hex digits in fifth group
148. age 4 132 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 10 8 Sample Period and PID Block Scheduling The PID block is a digital implementation of an analog control function so the dt sample time in the PID Output equation is not the infinitesimally small sample time available with analog controls The majority of processes being controlled can be approximated as a gain with a first or second order lag possibly with a pure time delay The PID block sets a CV output to the process and uses the process feedback PV to determine an Error to adjust the next CV output A key process parameter is the total time constant which is how fast does the PV respond when the CV is changed As discussed in the Setting Loop Gains section below the total time constant Tp Tc for a first order system is the time required for PV to reach 63 of its final value when CV is stepped The PID block will not be able to control a process unless its Sample Period is well under half the total time constant Larger Sample Periods will make it unstable The Sample Period should be no bigger than the total time constant divided by 10 or down to 5 worst case For example if PV seems to reach about 2 3 of its final value in 2 seconds the Sample Period should be less than 0 2 seconds or 0 4 seconds worst case On the other hand the Sample Period should not be too small such as less than the total time constant div
149. al PID storage Normally you would not need to change any of these values If you are calling the PID block in Auto mode after a long delay you may want to use 5 REQ 16 to load the current PLC elapsed time clock into Ref 23 to update the last PID solution time to avoid a step change on the integrator If you have set the Override low bit of the Control Word Ref 14 to 1 the next four bits of the Control Word must be set to control the PID block input contacts as described im Table 4 5 on the previous pages and the Internal SP and PV must be set as you have taken control of the PID block away from the ladder logic The internal parameter words are 9 10 6 PID Algorithm Selection PIDISA or PIDIND and Gains The PID block can be programmed selecting either the Independent PID IND term or standard ISA PID ISA versions of the PID algorithm The only difference in the algorithms is how the Integral and Derivative gains are defined To understand the difference you need to understand the following Both PID types calculate the Error term as SP PV which can be changed to Reverse Acting mode PV SP if the Error Term low bit 0 in the Config Word Ref 12 is set to 1 Reverse Acting mode may be used if you want the CV output to move in the opposite direction from PV input changes CV down for PV up rather than the normal CV up for PV up Error SP PV or PV SP if low bit of Config Word set to 1 The Derivative is normally based
150. ameter I1 The MOD function operates on these types of data Data Type Description INT Signed integer DINT Double precision signed integer The default data type is signed integer however it can be changed after selecting the function For more information on data types please refer to chapter 2 12 Program Organization and User References Data When the function receives power flow it divides input parameter I1 by input parameter I2 These parameters must be the same data type Output Q is calculated using the formula I1 I1 DIV I2 I2 where DIV produces an integer number Q is the same data type as input parameters I1 and I2 OK is always ON when the function receives power flow unless there is an attempt to divide by zero In that case it is set OFF enable 0x INT input parameter I1 I1 output parameter input Parameter I2 12 3 2 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed contains constant or reference for the value to be divided by I2 12 I2 contains a constant or reference for the value to be divided into I1 ok The ok output is energized when the function is performed without overflow Output contains the result of dividing 12 to obtain a remainder ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Ma
151. amming Software for Alspa C80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs User s Manual Please note the following restrictions 1 Time TMR ONDTR and OFDTR function blocks will not execute properly within a periodic subroutine A DOIO function block within a periodic subroutine whose reference range includes references assigned to a Smart Module HSC NBC etc will cause the CPU to lose communication with the module The SCN and LST SCN contacts 9051 and 9052 will have an indeterminate value during execution of the periodic subroutine A periodic subroutine cannot call or be called by other subroutines 2 The latency for the periodic subroutine 1 the maximum interval between the time the periodic subroutine should have executed and the time it actually executes can be around 0 35 milliseconds if there is no PCM CMM or ADC module in the main rack If there is a PCM CMM or ADC module in the main rack even if itis not configured or used the latency can be almost 2 25 milliseconds For that reason use of the periodic subroutine with PCM based products is not recommended 2 2 User References The data used in an application program is stored as either register or discrete references Table 2 5 Register References Type Description R The prefix R is used to assign system register references which will store program data such as the results of calculations AI The prefix represents an analo
152. and CV parameters must be used for remote operation of this PID block see below This allows remote operator interface devices such as acomputer to take control away from the PLC program Caution if you do not want this to happen make use the Control Word is set to 0 If the low bit is 0 the next 4 bits can be read to track the status of the PID input contacts as long as the PID Enable contact has power A discrete data structure with the first five bit positions in the following format Bit Word Value Function Status or External Action if Override bit set to 1 0 1 Override If0 monitor block contacts below If 1 set them externally 1 2 Manual If 1 block is in Manual mode other numbers Auto it is Automatic mode 2 4 Enable Should normally be 1 otherwise block is never called 3 8 UP Raise and Manual Bit 1 is 1 CV is being incremented every solution 4 16 DN Lower If 1 and Manual Bit 1 is 1 CV is being incremented every solution SP 15 Non configurable set and maintained by the PLC Tracks SP in must be set externally if Override 1 CV 16 Non configurable set and maintained by the PLC Tracks CV out PV 17 Non configurable set and maintained by the PLC Tracks PV in must be set externally if Override bit 1 Output 18 Non configurable setand maintained by the PLC This is a signed word value representing the output of the function block before the application of the optional inversion If no output
153. and R is not enabled Q Output Q contains the bit or word shifted out of the shift register For SHFR any discrete reference may be used it does not need to be byte aligned However 16 bits beginning with the reference address specified are displayed on line LEN LEN determines the length of the shift register For SHFR WORD LEN must be between 1 and 256 words For SHFR BIT LEN must be between 1 and 256 bits 6 4 2 Valid Memory Types e ce Valid reference for or WORD data or place where power flow through the function For SHFR_BIT discrete user references 961 Q M and T need not be byte aligned SA SB SC only 96S cannot be used li jh ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 67 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Example 1 In the following example the shift register operates on register memory locations 0001 to 0100 When the reset reference CLEAR is active the shift register words are set to zero When the NXT_CYC reference is active and CLEAR is not active the word from output status table location Q0033 is shifted into the shift register at R0001 The word shifted out of the shift register from 0100 is stored in output 0005 NXT CYC I I ISHFR WORD CLEAR I IR Ql M
154. arameter bit string mask M BN bit number of last compare bit number BIT 5 9 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable Permissive logic to enable the function Reference for the first bit string to be compared 12 Reference for the second bit string to be compared M Reference for the bit string mask BIT Reference for the bit number where the next comparison should start MC User logic to determine if a miscompare has occurred Q Output copy of the mask M bit string BN Number of the bit where the last compare occurred LEN LEN is the number of words in the bit string 5 9 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow I Q M MT PS G R WAQ const none enable o o o o o 12 ei MC Q BN e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function o Valid reference for WORD data only not valid for DWORD SA SB SC only 96S cannot be used t const value of 4095 for WORD and 2047 for DWORD ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 57 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Example In the following
155. arch for all array values for that particular operation Abbreviation Function Description SRCH EQ Search Equal Search for all array values equal to a specified value SRCH NE Search Not Equal Search for all array values not equal to a specified value SRCH GT Search Greater Than Search for all array values greater than a specified value SRCH GE Search Greater Than or Search for all array values greater than or equal to a specified value Equal SRCH LT Search Less Than Search for all array values less than a specified value SRCH LB Search Less Than Search for all array values less than or equal to a specified value or Equal Each function has four input parameters and two output parameters When the function receives power the array is searched starting at AR input NX This is the starting address of the array AR plus the index into this array input NX The search continues until the array element of the search object IN is found or until the end of the array is reached If an array element is found output parameter FD is set ON and output parameter output NX is set to the relative position of this element within the array If no array element is found before the end of the array is reached then output parameter FD is set OFF and output parameter output NX is set to zero ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 79 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set
156. arm power up sequence is the same except that step 1 is skipped 1 The CPU will run diagnostics on itself This includes checking a portion of battery backed RAM to determine whether or not the RAM contains valid data 2 Ifan EPROM EEPROM or flash memory is present and the PROM power up option in the PROM specifies that the PROM contents should be used the contents of PROM are copied into RAM memory If an EPROM EEPROM or flash memory is not present RAM memory remains the same and is not overwritten with the contents of PROM 3 The CPU interrogates each slot in the system to determine which boards are present 4 hardware configuration is compared with software configuration to ensure that they are the same Any mismatches detected are considered faults and are alarmed Also if a board is specified in the software configuration but a different module is present in the actual hardware configuration this condition is a fault and is alarmed 5 If there is no software configuration the CPU will use the default configuration 6 The CPU establishes the communications channel between itself and any intelligent modules 7 In the final step of the execution the mode of the first sweep is determined based on CPU configuration If RUN mode the sweep proceeds as described under STOP to RUN Mode Transition 2 5 on the next page shows the decision sequence for the CPU when it decides whether to copy from PROM or to power up in S
157. ates for the Alspa 80 35 PLC Model 331 or higher Model 331 340 and 341 I O systems support up to 49 Model 35 I O modules Model 351 systems support up to 79 Model 35 I O Modules The Alspa 80 35 PLC Model 311 or Model 313 5 slot baseplate supports up to 5 Model 35 I O modules the 10 10 baseplate supports up to 10 Model 35 I O modules The I O structure for the Alspa 80 35 PLC is shown in the following figure APPLICATION CACHE a43072 RAM MEMORY 4 16 gt kei Alspa C80 35 BACKPLANE Model 35 Model 35 Model 35 Alspa 80 35 DISCRETE DISCRETE ANALOG INPUT OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE GLOBAL N80 ALSPA N80 NETWORK Figure 2 7 Alspa 80 35 I O Structure The drawing shown above is specific to the Alspa 80 35 I O structure For information about the Alspa 80 25 I O structure refer to the ALS 52105 Alspa C80 25 PLC User s Manual For information about the Micro PLC I O structure refer to the ALS 52119 Alspa 80 05 Micro PLC User s Manual Page 2 34 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 System Operation 6 1 Model 35 I O Modules Model 35 I O modules are available as five types discrete input discrete output analog input analog output and option modules The following table lists the Model 35 I O modules by catalog number number of I O points and a brief description of each module All of
158. atic initialization occurs at power up enable Q reset R preset value PV address 3 words 2 5 1 Parameters Parameter Description address The UPCTR uses three consecutive words registers of R memory to store the following Current value CV word 1 Preset value word 2 Control word word 3 When you enter an UPCTR you must enter an address for the location of these three consecutive words registers directly below the graphic representing the function Note Do not use this address with another up counter down counter or any other instruction or improper operation will result Caution Overlapping references will result in erratic operation of the counter enable On a positive transition of enable the current count is incremented by one R When R receives power flow it resets the current value back to zero PV PV is the value to copy into the counter s preset value when the counter is enabled or reset Q Output Q is energized when the current value is greater than or equal to the preset value 2 5 2 Valid Memory Types ni i E pue Nur e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Page 4 18 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102
159. ation stack overflow 05 48 58 Application stack overflow 05 48 58 Failed battery signal 05 42 30 ID STOP FAULT ONLINE 4 ACC WRITE LOGIC ONFIG EQUAL NP8NLESSON PRG LESSON REPLACE Both tables contain similar information The PLC fault table contains Fault location Fault description Date and time of fault The I O fault table contains Fault location Reference address Fault category Fault type Date and time of fault Page B 2 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Interpreting Faults Using Alspa P8 25 35 05 Software 1 PLC FAULT TABLE The Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs maintain additional information on each fault that because of space limitations on the Alspa P8 screen is not displayed This additional fault table information may be viewed by positioning the cursor on the fault and pressing the CTRL and F keys together A line of hexadecimal characters is displayed on the line directly beneath the fault name as shown in the example screen below This is the full fault entry as stored by the PLC CPU This additional data along with suggestions for fixing the fault may also be viewed by positioning the cursor on the fault and pressing the Zoom F10 key EXIT Uu nbus e 0 2 System configuration mismatch 01 22 05 50 45 00 000000 00037EFZ OBO3 0100 000000000000000000047E0COB0301000000000000000
160. bit of the specified word is the first bit of the array The value displayed contains 16 bits regardless of the length of the array The indices in an ARRAY MOVE instruction are 1 based In using an ARRAY MOVE no element outside either the source or destination arrays as specified by their starting address and length may be referenced The ok output will receive power flow unless one of the following conditions occurs Enable is OFF N SNX 1 is greater than LEN N DNX 1 is greater than LEN enable ok MOVE_ BIT source array address SR DS destination array address LEN 00001 source array index SNX destination array index elements to transfer Page 4 76 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 7 1 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed SR SR contains the starting address of the source array For ARRAY MOVE any reference may be used it does not need to be byte aligned However 16 bits beginning with the reference address specified are displayed on line SNX SNX contains the index of the source array DNX DNX contains the index of the destination array N N provides a count indicator ok The ok output is energized whenever enable is energized DS DS contains the starting address o
161. ble functions operate on these types of data Data Type Description INT Signed integer DINT Double precision signed integer BIT Bit data type BYTE Byte data type WORD Word data type Only available for ARRAY_MOVE The default data type is signed integer The data type can be changed after selecting the specific data table function To compare data of other types or of two different types first use the appropriate conversion function described in 9 Conversion Functions to change the data to one of the data types listed above ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 75 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 7 1 ARRAY MOVE INT DINT BIT BYTE WORD Use the Array Move ARRAY_MOVE function to copy a specified number of data elements from a source array to a destination array The ARRAY_MOVE function has five input parameters and two output parameters When the function receives power flow the number of data elements in the count indicator N is extracted from the input array starting with the indexed location SR SNX 1 The data elements are written to the output array starting with the indexed location DS DNX 1 The LEN operand specifies the number of elements that make up each array For ARRAY MOVE BIT when word oriented memory is selected for the parameters of the source array and or destination array starting address the least significant
162. c ota d Rc UU NOR RC heal ted aca 1 1 3 4 Convert Data to Another 1 37 3 5 Compare Two Numbers oeste ei ied Mad Cepeda 1 17 3 6 Manipulate Bit Strings 1 7 3 4 Move Data EEE Ml 1 17 3 8 Array Move and 1 7 39 1 3 10 Communicate with Other Modules p 3 11 Special Services from the PLC 1 4 3 12 Rung Explanation ees be Pe e ee sce andl E 1 4 3 13 Control P nctohs ea ea 3 14 Additional Reference 1 37 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM OPERATION 2 15 1 PLC SWEEP SUMMARY 1 nec AB waa Vaated e en da vs 2 17 1 1 Standard Program Sweep 2 11 4 Sweep Time Calculation spaces Ota ee EEG 2 1 1 2 Example of Sweep Time Calculation 2 113 Housekeeping 22 e e eng see ved Maa Mack bod awed RD eer as ME eos 2 11 4 Input Scan eh pee SEER Lees eda nw LES 2 1 1 5 Application Prog
163. chever is encountered first This instruction is useful for debugging purposes but it is not permitted in SFC programming refer to the Note on 1 97 MCR Programs a Master Control Relay An MCR causes all rungs between the MCR and its 19 and subsequent ENDMCR to be executed without power flow Alspa 8 25 35 05 software MCRN supports two forms of the MCR function a non nested form MCR and a nested form MCRN ENDMCR Indicates that the subsequent logic is to be executed with normal power flow 1 100 and Alspa P8 25 35 05 software supports two forms of the ENDMCR function a non nested ENDMCRN form ENDMCR and a nested form ENDMCRN JUMP Causes program execution to jump to a specified location indicated by a LABEL see below T 01 and in the logic Alspa 8 25 35 05 software supports two forms of the JUMP function JUMPN non nested form JUMP and a nested form JUMPN LABEL Specifies the target location of a JUMP instruction Alspa P8 25 35 05 software supports 1 105 and two forms of the LABEL function a non nested form LABEL and a nested form LABELN LABELN text can be typed in by zooming into the instruction COMMENT Placesacomment rung explanation in the program After programming the instruction the T 04 SVCREQ Requests one of the following special PLC services T1094 Change Read Task State and Number of Words to Checksum Change Read Time of Day Clock Shu
164. ct contacts E3 E6 E7 E8 and E9 to E2 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 7 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 1 16 Continuation Coils lt gt and Contacts lt gt Continuation coils t lt gt and continuation contacts lt gt are used to continue relay ladder rung logic beyond the limit of ten columns The state of the last executed continuation coil is the flow state that will be used on the next executed continuation contact If the flow of logic does not execute a continuation coil before it executes a continuation contact the state of the contact will be no flow There can be only one continuation coil and contact per rung the continuation contact must be in column 1 and the continuation coil must be in column 10 An example continuation coil and contact are shown below EZ STATUS SETUP FOLDER UTILTY PRINT 41 SITIUT TID gt 1140 00 1141 07 19086 AND_ WORD B152_00 5 152_00 5 111 11 Q To001 0997 REG 112 112 DUELL T 10041 710063 Q0023 70063 7M0234 FST_SCN T0231 710003 C HH ko 700043 10074 0099 END OF PROGRAM LOGIC 1 NP8 LESSON gt irai 0007 REPLACE 4 8 A
165. ction 4 4 Logical NOT function 4 46 Logical OR function 4 47 Logical XOR function T LOS 2 23 LOS SIO 2 23 Loss of I O module 3 197 Loss of or missing option module 3 10 Low battery signal 3 177 LOW BAT 2 27 LST_SCN 2 21 LT 4 35 M Maintenance 3 Masked compare function 4 50 Master control relay function 4 97 Math functions 4 231 ACOS 4 3 ADD 4 2 ASIN 4 3 4 3 4 3 DEG 4 3 DIV 4 2 4 3 Index 12 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual EXPT 4 37 LN 4 3 LOG 4 4 2 MUL 4 2 4 3 SIN 4 3 SORT 4 SUB 4 2 4 3 4 91 Memory corrupted 3 9 Micro Models 2 58 Mnemonics instruction C Tp MOD 4 27 Model 25 I O modules 2 31 Model 35 I O modules 2 31 Modulo function 4 20 MOVE 4 67 Move function 4 60 4 507 MUL 4 27 Multiplication function 4 27 N Natural logarithm function 4 31 NE 4 31 Negated coil 4 4 Negated retentive coil 4 4 Negative transition coil 4 3 No user program present 3 11 Normally closed contact 4 4 Normally open contact 4 1 NOT 4 407 Not equal function 4 337 OFDT 4 1 Off delay timer 4 11 On delay timer 4 107 4 13 ALS 52102 ONDTR 4 107 Operation of system 2 F Operational failures 3 1 Option module software failure 3
166. ction using the Alspa P8 25 35 05 instruction set The first method is to use an up down counter pair with a shared register for the accumulated or current value When the parts enter the storage area the up counter increments by 1 increasing the current value of the parts in storage by a value of 1 When a part leaves the storage area the down counter decrements by 1 decreasing the inventory storage value by 1 To avoid conflict with the shared register both counters use different register addresses When a register counts its current value must be moved to the current value register of the other counter 510003 1 1 510001 510009 4 CONST PV 400005 580100 110003 1 1 INT 10001 4 580100 IN 0 80104 LEN 00001 510003 1 1 10002 4 10009 4 CONST PV 400005 580104 510002 1 1 INT 10003 980104 IN 0 580100 LEN 100001 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 21 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set The second method shown below uses the ADD and SUB functions to provide storage tracking 1510004 M0001 1 10005 M0002 5 0001 1 1 I II ADD
167. d Time required to execute the function when power flows into the function or function block however it is in an inactive state as when a timer is held in the reset state Timers and counters are updated each time they are encountered in the logic timers by the amount of time consumed by the last sweep and counters by one count ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page A 1 Instruction Timing Table A 1 Instruction Timing Function Enabled Disabled Increment Group Function 311 313 331 341 311 313 331 341 311 313 331 341 Size SN Timers On Delay Timer 146 81 101 42 105 39 46 21 15 Off Delay Timer 98 47 54 23 116 63 73 32 9 Timer 122 76 95 40 103 54 66 30 15 Counters Up Counter 137 70 87 36 130 63 78 33 11 Down Counter 136 70 86 37 127 61 75 31 11 Math Addition INT 76 47 56 24 41 0 0 0 13 Addition DINT 90 60 76 34 41 1 0 0 13 Subtraction INT 75 46 57 25 41 0 0 0 13 Subtraction DINT 92 62 78 34 41 1 0 0 13 Multiplication INT 79 49 62 28 41 0 0 0 13 Multiplication DINT 108 80 100 43 41 1 0 0 13 Division INT 79 51 61 27 41 0 0 0 13 Division DINT 375 346 434 175 41 1 0 0 13 Modulo Division
168. d should be either a 0 positive or 1 negative value or the DINT number is too big to convert to 16 bit A common application is to scale analog input values with a MUL operation followed by an DIV and possible an ADD operation With a range up to 32000 using MUL INT will overflow Using an AI value for a MUL DINT will also not work as the 32 bit I1 will combine 2 analog inputs at the same time You must move the analog input to the low word of a double register then test the sign and set the second register to O if positive or 1 if it was negative Use the double register with the MUL DINT for a 32 product for the following DIV function For example the following logic could be used to scale a 10 volt input to 25000 engineering units 5 ALW ON MOVE INT 0001 CONST IN Q RO002 980001 I1 00000 LEN 100001 CONST 12 00000 MUL DIV DINT DINT ROO001 I1 Q RO003 RO003 I1 Q RO005 12 CONST 12 0000025000 0000032000 Page 4 26 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 3 2 MOD INT DINT The Modulo MOD function is used to divide one value by another value of the same data type to obtain the remainder The sign of the result is always the same as the sign of input par
169. ds can be selected or up to 500 milliseconds for the 351 and 352 CPUS for the constant sweep timer default is 100 milliseconds ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 11 System Operation Due to variations in the time required for various parts of the PLC sweep the constant sweep time should be set at least 10 milliseconds higher than the sweep time that is displayed on the status line when the PLC is in NORMAL SWEEP mode This prevents the occurrence of extraneous oversweep faults One reason for using CONSTANT SWEEP TIME mode might be to ensure that I O are updated at constant intervals Another reason might be to ensure that a certain amount of time elapses between the output scan and the next sweep s input scan permitting inputs to settle after receiving output data from the program If the constant sweep timer expires before the sweep completes the entire sweep including the windows is completed However an oversweep fault is logged at the beginning of the next sweep Remember unlike the ACTIVE CONSTANT SWEEP which can be edited only in RUN mode the CONFIGURED CONSTANT SWEEP Mode can be edited only during STOP mode and you must Store the configuration from the Programmer to the PLC before the change will take effect Once stored this becomes the default sweep mode 1 5 2 PLC Sweep When STOP Mode When the PLC is in STOP mode the application program is not executed Y
170. e In the following examples an ENDMCR instruction is programmed to terminate MCR range clear Example of non nested ENDMCR CLEAR ENDMCR Example of a nested ENDMCR Page 4 100 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 6 JUMP Use the JUMP instruction to cause a portion of the program logic to be bypassed Program execution will continue at the LABEL specified When the JUMP is active all coils within its scope are left at their previous states This includes coils associated with timers counters latches and relays Alspa P8 25 35 05 software supports two forms of the JUMP instruction a non nested and a nested form The non nested form has the form LABELOI where LABELOI is the name of the corresponding non nested LABEL instruction For non nested JUMPs there can be only a single JUMP instruction for each LABEL instruction The JUMP can be either a forward or a backward JUMP The range for non nested JUMPs and LABELs cannot overlap the range of any other JUMP LABEL pair or any MCR ENDMCR pair of instructions Non nested JUMPs and their corresponding LABELs cannot be within the scope of any other JUMP LABEL pair or any MCR ENDMCR pair In addition an MCR ENDMCR pair or another JUMP LABEL pair cannot be within the scope of a non nested JUMP LABEL pair The non nested form of the JUMP instruction is
171. e 3 177 constant sweep time exceeded 3 1 corrupted user program power up 3 1H CTRL F to display hexadecimal fault information 3 fault category 3 1 fault description 3 14 fault handling 3 fault type 3 1 t hexadecimal display of fault information uu Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Index 9 Index T O fault group B 1 I O fault table 3 I O fault table explanations 3 187 interpreting a fault B loss of module 3 1 loss of or missing option module 3 107 low battery signal 3 1T no user program present 3 1 non configurable faults Sz option module software failure 3 1T password access failure 3 1 PLC CPU system software failure 3 11 PLC fault group B PLC fault table 3 PLC fault table explanations a program block checksum failure reset of addition of or extra option module 3 1 system configuration mismatch 3 11 Fault group B LIP 1 Fault handling MEN alarm processor 1 fault action Fault references 3 4 definitions of 3 1 Fault type 3 137 Faults 3 accessing additional fault information 3 87 actions 3 1 addition of I O module 3 1 additional fault effects 3 17 application fault 3 1 classes of faults 3 communications failure during store 3 1T constant sweep time exceeded 3 1 corrupted user program on power up 3 1 CTRL
172. e and file write include functions Becausethis memory is intended for temporary use itis never retained through power loss or RUN to STOP to RUN transitions and cannot be used with retentive coils S The S prefix represents system status references Thesereferences are used to access special PLC data suchas timers scan information and fault information System references include S SA SB and SC references 905 WSA SB and SC can be used on any contacts SA SB and SC can be used on retentive coils M 905 can be used as word or bit string input arguments to functions or function blocks PSA 8 and SC can be used as word or bit string input or output arguments to functions and function blocks G The G prefix represents global datareferences These references are used to access data shared among several PLCs G references can be used on contacts and retentive coils because G memory is always retentive G cannot be used on non retentive coils Retentiveness is based on the type of coil For more information refer to Retentiveness of Data on pagp 1 20 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 19 System Operation 2 3 Transitions and Overrides The 901 Q M and G user references have associated transition and override bits T 905 SA SB and SC references have transition bits but not override bits The CPU uses transition bits
173. e information contained herein No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply In this publication no mention is made of rights with respect to trademarks or tradenames that may attach to certain words or signs The absence of such mention however in no way implies there is no protection Copyright GE Fanuc All rights including trade secret rights are reserved Unauthorized use of the information is strictly prohibited Page 2 Alspa C80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Revisions Index letter Date Nature of revision September 1995 Changes made to this manual reflect the features of Release 5 Octo ber 1994 of Alspa P8 25 35 05 software for Alspa 80 35 PLCs Alspa 80 25 PLCs and Alspa 80 05 Micro PLCs Additionally corrections have been made where necessary The following list des cribes the major revisions of this manual as compared to the previous version ALS 52102 a This manual includes software related information about the recently released Model 351 CPU such as sweep impact refer to chapter 2 and timing information refer to appendix A For additional information about the 351 CPU refer to the ALS 52117 Alspa C80 35 PLC Installation Manual and the IPI that comes with the CPU There is a new Alspa 8000 Micro PLC Model CE693UDRO005 discussed briefly in chapter 2 This Micro PLC has 28 DC inputs and 28 relay outputs For more information
174. e information in this appendix will enable you to interpret the message structure format when reading these fault tables This is a sample I O fault table as it is displayed in Alspa P8 25 35 05 configuration software PROGRM TABLES E sETUP FOLDER UTILTY PRINT SUCI gt Iv0 FAULT TABLE TOP FAULT DISPLAYED 00002 TABLE LAST CLEARED 01 21 08 26 37 TOTAL FAULTS 00002 ENTRIES OVERFLOWED 00000 FAULT DESCRIPTION PLC DATE TIME 01 22 05 54 48 FAULT CIRC REFERENCE FAULT FAULT DATE TIME LOCATION NO ADDR CATEGORY 0 3 ADD N OF 1 0 MODULE 01 22 05 54 13 0 3 ADD N OF 1 0 MODULE 01 22 05 54 02 ID STOP NO 10 ONLINE 4 ACC WRITE LOGIC ONFIG EQUAL NPBNLESSUN PRG LESSON REPLACE ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page Interpreting Faults Using Alspa 8 25 35 05 Software This is a sample PLC fault table as it is displayed in Alspa P8 25 35 05 programming software 140 1 SETUP FOLDER UTILTY PRINT 390340 2307300777 gt PLC FAULT TABLE TOP FAULT DISPLAYED 00005 TABLE LAST CLEARED 01 22 05 42 30 TOTAL FAULTS 00005 ENTRIES OVERFLOWED 00000 PLC DATE TIME 01 22 05 51 18 FAULT FAULT DATE TIME LOCATION DESCRIPTION M D 5 System configuration mismatch 01 22 05 50 45 Password access failed 05 49 24 Applic
175. e input bit string R0001 is unchanged If the same reference is used for IN and Q a rotation will occur in place 510001 I WORD 380001 IN 380002 LEN 100001 CONST N 00003 ROOO1 MSB LSB MSB LSB Page 4 50 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 5 6 BTST WORD The Bit Test BTST function is used to test a bit within a bit string to determine whether that bit is currently 1 0 The result of the test is placed in output Q Each sweep power is received the BTST function sets its output to the same state as the specified bit If a register rather than a constant is used to specify the bit number the same function block can test different bits on successive sweeps If the value of BIT is outside the range 1 lt BIT lt 16 LEN then Q is set OFF A string length of 1 to 256 words can be selected enable BETTE bit to be tested IN Q output parameter LEN 100001 bit number of IN BIT 5 6 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the bit test is performed IN INcontains the first word of the data to be operated on BIT contains the bit number of IN that should be tested Valid rangeis 1 lt BIT I6 LEN M Output Q is ener
176. e is exceeded the OK LED goes off the CPU is placed in reset and completely shuts down and outputs go to their default state No communication of any form is possible and all microprocessors on all boards are halted To recover power must be cycled on the rack containing the CPU In the Alspa C80 25 and 340 and higher CPUs a watchdog timer causes the CPU to reset execute its powerup logic generate a watchdog failure fault and change its mode to STOP 4 4 Constant Sweep Timer The constant sweep timer controls the length of a program sweep when the Alspa C80 35 PLC operates in Constant Sweep Time mode In this mode of operation each sweep consumes the same amount of time Typically for most application programs the input scan application program logic scan and output scan do not require exactly the same amount of execution time in each sweep The value of the constant sweep timer is set by the programmer and can be any value from 5 to the value of the watchdog timer default is 100 milliseconds If the constant sweep timer expires before the completion of the sweep and the previous sweep was not oversweep the PLC places an oversweep alarm in the PLC fault table At the beginning of the next sweep the PLC sets the OV SWP fault contact The SWP contact is reset when the PLC is not in Constant Sweep Time mode or the time of the last sweep did not exceed the constant sweep timer 4 5 Time Tick Contacts The Alspa 8000 PLC pr
177. e retentive coils M negated retentive coils M retentive SET coils SM and retentive RESET coils RM The last time a Q or M reference is programmed on a coil instruction determines whether the Q or M reference is retentive or non retentive based on the coil type For example if Q0001 was last programmed as the reference of a retentive coil the 00001 data will be retentive However if 00001 was last programmed on a non retentive coil then the 00001 data will be non retentive Page 2 20 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 System Operation 2 5 Data Types Data types include the following Table 2 7 Data Types Type Name INT Signed Integer Binary Coded Decimal DINT Double Precision Signed Integer BIT BYTE Byte WORD BCD 4 Four Digit Description Data Format Signed integers use 16 bit memory data Reoister 1 locations and are represented in 2 s ays complementnotation The valid range of an 7 1 16 bit positions INT data type is 32 768 to 32 767 Double precision signed integers are stored in 32 bit data memory locations actually Register 2 Register 1 two consecutive 16 bit memory locations and represented 2 s complement 32 17 16 1 notation Bit 32 is the sign bit The valid range of a DINT data type is 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 867 Two
178. eR Ka PEN B 17 Table Alarm Error Codes for PLC CPU Software Faults 4 Table 4 Alarm Error Codes for PLC Faults B T Table B 5 PLC Fault Data Illegal Boolean Opcode Detected B 37 Table B 6 PLC Fault Time Stamp B 37 Table B 7 I O Fault Table Format Indicator Byte B 10 Table B 8 Reference Address nee e B 10 Table B 9 I O Reference Address Memory Type B 10 Tabl e 10 Fault Groups Re D es es S B 11 Table B 11 Fault Actions B 17 Table B 12 I O Fault Specific Data B 177 Table B 13 I O Fault Time Stamp B 17 Page 20 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Chapter Introduction 1 The Alspa 80 35 PLC Alspa 80 25 PLC and Alspa 80 05 Micro PLC are members of the Cegelec Alspa 8000 PLC range of programmable logic controllers PLCs They are easy to install and configure offer advanced programming features and are compatible with the Alspa C80
179. ed 4 1e19 The exponent cannot contain spaces between digits or characters This is accepted as 4 1e0 and an error message is displayed ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page E 5 Using Floating Point Numbers Internal Format of Floating Point Numbers Floating point numbers are stored in single precision IEEE standard format This format requires 32 bits which translates to two adjacent 16 bit PLC registers The encoding of the bits is diagrammed below Bits 17 32 gt a Bits 1 16 1 17116 23 bit mantissa gt 8 bit exponent 1 bit sign Bit 32 Register use by a single floating point number is diagrammed below In this diagram if the floating point number occupies registers R5 and R6 for example then R5 is the least significant register and R6 is the most significant register Least Significant Register Bits 1 16 16 1 Least Significant Bit Bit 1 Ja Most Significant Bit Bit 16 Most Significant Registex _ Bits 17 32 gt 2 17 T Least Significant Bit Bit 17 lt Most Significant Bit Bit 32 Page E 6 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Refer
180. ed unless the specified conversion would result in a value that is out of range It is possible for a loss of precision to occur when converting from DINT to REAL since the number of significant bits is reduced to 24 This function is only available on the 352 CPU enable 1 value to be converted IN 0 output parameter 0 Page 4 86 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 8 4 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the conversion is performed IN IN contains a reference for the integer value to be converted to REAL ok The ok output is energized when the function is performed without error Q contains the REAL form of the original value in IN 8 4 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow 1 Q M T S G R AI const none enable IN ok Q e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function o Not valid for DINT_TO_REAL Example In the following example the integer value of input IN is 678 The result value placed 6 T0016 is 678000 INT REAL TOO01 IN Q RO016 8 5 gt WORD REAL The Convert to WORD function is used to output the WORD e
181. ed as 120 will be displayed as 1 20 Sec and will result in a Kd delta Error delta time or 120 4 3 contribution to the PID Output if Error was changing by 4 PV Counts every 30 milliseconds Kd can be used to speed up a slow loop response but is very sensitive to PV input noise Integral Rate 07 This INT number determines the change in CV Counts if the Error were a constant 1 PV Count Itis displayed as 0 000 Repeats Sec with an implied decimal point of 3 Forexample a Kientered as 1400 will be displayed as 1 400 Repeats Sec and will result in a Ki Error dt or 1400 20 50 1000 contribution to PID Output for an Error of 20 PV Counts and a 50 millisecond PLC sweep time Sample Period of 0 Kiis usually the second gain set after Kp CV Bias Output Offset An INT value in CV Counts added to the PID Output before the rate and amplitude clamps It can 08 be used to set non zero CV values if only Kp Proportional gains are used or for feed forward control of this PID loop output from another control loop CV Upper and Lower INT values in CV Counts that define the highest and lowest value for CV These values are Clamps required and the Upper Clamp must have a more positive value than the Lower Clamp or the 09 10 PID block will not work These are usually used to define limits based on physical limits for a CV output They are also used to scale the Bar Graph display for CV for the P8 or ADS PID display The block
182. ediately The timeout value is ignored This is referred to as NOWAIT mode If the command block specifies that the program will wait for a reply the command block contents are sent to the receiving device and the CPU waits for a reply The maximum length of time the PLC will wait for the device to respond is specified in the command block If the device does not respond within that time program execution resumes This is referred to as WAIT mode The Function Faulted FT output may be set ON if 1 The specified target address is not present SYSID 2 The specified task is not valid for the device TASK 3 The data length is 0 4 The device s status pointer address part of the command block does not exist This may be due to an incorrect memory type selection or an address within that memory type that is out of range 6 6 1 Command Block The command block provides information to the intelligent module on the command to be performed The address of the command block is specified for the IN input to the COMMREQ function This address may be in any word oriented area of memory R AI or AQ The length of the command block depends on the amount of data sent to the device Page 4 72 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set The command block has the following structure Length in words address WaivNoWaitFlag address 1 Status Pointe
183. ef 0005 Proportional Gain 0 01 CV PV 96 0 to 327 67 96 96 Ref 0006 Derivative Gain Kd 0 01 seconds 0 to 327 67 sec Ref 0007 Integral Rate Ki Repeat 1000 Sec 0 to 32 767 repeat sec FRef 0008 CV Bias Output Offset CV Counts 32000 to 32000 add to integrator output JRef 0009 Upper Clamp CV Counts 32000 to 32000 gt Ref 10 output limit JRef 0010 Lower Clamp CV Counts 32000 to 32000 lt Ref 09 output limit Ref 0011 Minimum Slew Time Second Full Travel 0 none to 32000 sec to move 32000 CV JRef 0012 Config Word Low 5 bits used Bit 0 to 2 for Error OutPolarity Deriv JRef 0013 Manual Command CV Counts Tracks CV in Auto or Sets CV in Manual JRef 0014 Control Word Maintained by the PLC maintained unless set otherwise low bit sets PLC unless Bit 1 is Override if 1 see description in the PID set Parameters Details table oft Table 4 5 FRef 0015 Internal SP N A set and Non configurable maintained by the PLC FRef 0016 Internal CV N A set and Non configurable maintained by the PLC JRef 0017 Internal PV N A set and Non configurable maintained by the PLC Ref 0018 Output N A set and Non configurable maintained by the PLC JRef 0019 Diff Term Storage N A set and Non configurable maintained by the PLC JRef 0020 Int Term Storage N A set and Non configurable and maintained by the JRef 0021 PLC JRef 0022 Slew Term Storage N A set and Non configurable maintained by the PLC ALS 52102
184. eived the AND or OR function examines each bit in bit string I1 and the corresponding bit in bit string I2 beginning at the least significant bit in each For each two bits examined for the AND function if both are 1 then a 1 is placed in the corresponding location in output string If either or both bits are 0 then a 0 is placed in string Q in that location The AND function is useful for building masks or screens where only certain bits are passed through those that are opposite a 1 in the mask and all other bits are set to 0 The function can also be used to clear the selected area of word memory by ANDing the bits with another bit string known to contain all Os The I1 and 12 bit strings specified may overlap For each two bits examined for the OR function if either or both bits are 1 then a 1 is placed in the corresponding location in output string If both bits are 0 then a 0 is placed in string in that location The OR function is useful for combining strings and to control many outputs through the use of one simple logical structure The function is the equivalent of two relay contacts in parallel multiplied by the number of bits in the string It can be used to drive indicator lamps directly from input states or superimpose blinking conditions on status lights ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 41 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set The function passes power flow
185. em Status References System status references in the Alspa 8000 PLC are assigned to S SA SB and SC memory They each have a nickname Examples of time tick references include 10 5 100 5 T_SEC and T_MIN Examples of convenience references include FST_SCN ALW_ON and ALW_OFF S bits are read only bits do not write to these bits You may however write to SA SB and SC bits Listed below are available system status references which may be used in an application program When entering logic either the reference or the nickname can be used Refer to chapter 3 Fault Explanations and Correction for more detailed fault descriptions and information on correcting the fault It is possible to use these special names in another context However if you attempt to use one of these names for some other use e g logic block name folder name etc the Alspa P8 25 35 05 software displays this prompt Reuse system reserved nickname Y N References not listed in the following table are not used for the Alspa 80 35 Alspa 80 25 PLC Table 2 8 System Status References Reference Nickname Definition S0001 FST_SCN Setto 1 when the current sweep is the first sweep 80002 LST_SCN Reset from to 0 when the current sweep is the last sweep S0003 T 10MS 0 01 second timer contact S0004 T 100MS 0 1 second timer contact 926S0005 T SEC 1 0 second timer contact 50006 T MIN 1 0 minute timer co
186. en R is energized the step number is set to this value ST contains the first word of the bit sequencer The ok output is energized whenever the function is enabled LEN must be between 1 and 256 bits Page 4 70 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Coil checking for the BITSEQ function checks for 16 bits from the ST parameter even when LEN is less than 16 6 5 3 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow onst none none address E H E ee ee p eq eer 20 ES En LE er Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function SA SB SC only 905 cannot be used Example In the following example the sequencer operates on register memory 0001 Its static data is stored in registers 0010 ROO11 and 6R0012 When CLEAR is active the sequencer is reset and the current step is set to step number 3 The first 8 bits of R0001 are set to zero When NXT SEQ is active and CLEAR is not active the bit for step number 3 is cleared and the bit for step number 2 or 4 depending on whether DIR is energized is set INXT SEQ 1
187. en an I O module which had been faulted returns to operation 1 No action necessary if the module was removed or replaced or the remote rack was power cycled 2 Update the configuration file or remove the module which the configuration file indicates should be empty 1 Remove module It may be in the wrong slot 2 Update and restore the configuration file to include the extra module ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 3 19 Fault Explanations and Correction Page 3 20 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Chapter Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 4 Programming consists of creating an application program for PLC Because the Alspa 80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs have a common instruction set all three can be programmed using this software This chapter describes the programming instructions that may be used to create ladder logic programs for the Alspa 80 35 and Alspa 80 25 programmable controllers If Alspa P8 25 35 05 programming software is not yet installed please refer to the ALS 52201 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs User s Manual for instructions The user s manual explains how to create transfer edit and print programs Configuration is the process of assigning logical addresses as well as other characteristics to the hardware modules in the
188. ence Manual ALS 52102 Numbers 351 and 352 CPUs changing mode with key switch 2 17 351 and 352 CPUs key switch 2 11 A ACOS 4 307 ADD 4 27 ADD_IOM 2 27 ADD SIO 2 27 Addition function 4 27 Addition of I O module 3 Alarm 3 1 Alarm error codes Alarm processor 3 1 Alspa C80 05 Micro PLC I O system 2 3 Micro CPU and I O 2 587 Alspa C80 25 PLC I O system 2 3 model 25 I O modules 2 30 Alspa 80 35 PLC I O system 2 3 default conditions for model 35 output modules c diagnostic data global data I O data formats 36 T O structure 2 3 model 35 I O modules 2 31 ALT keys D F OFF 2 27 ALW ON 2 21 AND 4 4 ANY_FLT 2 23 APL FLT 2 23 Application fault 3 137 Application program logic scan 2 87 ARRAY MOVE 4 70 ASIN 4 30 ATAN 4 30 ALS 52102 BAD_PWD 2 27 BAD_RAM 2 27 Base 10 logarithm function 4 37 Battery signal low 3 177 BCD 4 2 2 4 81 BCLR 4 57 BIT 2 2F Bit clear function 4 57 Bit operation functions 4 40 AND 4 4 BCLR 4 BPOS 4 5 BSET 4 5 BTST 4 5 4 4 4 4 4 ROL 4 ROR 4 4 SHL 4 4 SHR 4 4 4 4 Bit position function 4 54 Bit sequencer function 4 69 Bit set function 4 57 Bit test function 4 5 BITSEQ 4 6 memory required 4 697 BLKCLR 4 6 BLKMOV 4 637 Block clear function 4
189. er stops the current value stops incrementing and is retained Output Q if energized will remain energized When the function receives power flow again the current value again increments beginning at the retained value When reset R receives power flow the current value is set back to zero and output is de energized unless PV equals zero enable Q time Qul 0 reset R preset value address 3 words ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 11 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 2 2 1 Parameters Parameter Description address The ONDTR uses three consecutive words registers of R memory to store the following e Current value CV word 1 Preset value PV word 2 e Control word word 3 When you enter an ONDTR you must enter an address for the location of these three consecutive words registers directly below the graphic representing the function Note Do not use this address with other instructions Caution Overlapping references will result in erratic operation of the timer enable When enable receives power flow the timer s current value is incremented R When R receives power flow it resets the current value to zero PV PV is the value to copy into the timer s preset value when the timer is enabled or reset Q Output Q is energized when the current value is greater than or equal to the preset value time Time incre
190. ete input 0 030 0 055 0 206 32 point discrete input 0 043 0 073 0 269 8 point discrete output 0 030 0 053 0 197 16 point discrete output 0 030 0 053 0 197 32 point discrete output 0 042 0 070 0 259 Combination discrete input output 0 060 0 112 0 405 4 channel analog input 0 075 0 105 0 396 2 channel analog output 0 058 0 114 0 402 16 channel analog input 0 978 1 446 3 999 current or voltage 8 channel analog output 1 274 1 988 4 472 Combination analog input output 1 220 1 999 4 338 High Speed Counter 1 381 2 106 5 221 APM 1 axis 1 527 2 581 6 388 I O Processor 1 574 2 402 6 388 Ethernet Interface no connection 0 038 0 041 0 053 no devices 0 911 1 637 5 020 NCM 8 x 64 point 8 826 16 932 21 179 devices no devices 0 567 0 866 1 830 32 x 64 point 1 714 2 514 5 783 devices no devices 0 798 1 202 2 540 NBC 32 64 pt devices 18 382 25 377 70 777 not configured 0 476 no application task PCM 311 read 128 R as 0 485 N A N A fast as possible ADC no task 0 476 N A N A Page 2 6 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 1 1 1 Sweep Time Calculation System Operation TE a 2 1 lists seven items that contribute to the sweep time of the PLC The sweep time consists of fixed times ousekeeping and diagnostics and variable times Variable times vary according to the I O configuration size of the user program and the type of programming device connected to the
191. even though the PLC has no power the analog output module will continue to operate in its selected default state Page 2 36 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 System Operation 6 4 Diagnostic Data Diagnostic bits are available in S memory that will indicate the loss of an I O module a mismatch in I O configuration Diagnostic information is not available for individual I O points More information on fault handling can be found later in this chapter and in chapter Fault Explanations and Correction 6 5 Global Data The Alspa C80 35 PLC supports very fast sharing of data between multiple CPUs using N80 global data The N80 bus controller IC693BEM334 CPU version 5 and later and the enhanced N80 Communications module 1C693CMM305 can broadcast up to 128 bytes of data to other PLCs or computers They can receive up to 128 bytes from each of the up to 30 other NBC on the network Data can be broadcast from or received into any memory type not just G global bits The original N80 Communications module IC693CMM304 was limited to fixed G addresses and could only exchange 32 bits per serial bus address from SBA 16 to 23 This first card should not be used as the enhanced NCM has 50 times the capability Global data can be shared between Alspa 8000 PLCs existing on the same Alspa N80 network There is a preconfigured method of sharing global data No configuration is required by the user
192. example after first scan MSKCMPW function block is executed 0001 through 0016 is compared with 0017 through 0032 0033 through M0048 contains the mask value The value in 60001 determines at which bit position the comparison starts within the two input strings The contents of the above references before the function block is executed are as follows I1 MO0001 6C6Ch 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 I2 M0017 606Fh 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 M0033 000Fh 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 BIT BN R0001 0 MC 200001 OFF The contents of these references after the function block 15 executed are as follows I1 M0001 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 12 M0017 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 M0033 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 BIT BN R0001 8 MC 00001 ON Page 4 58 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Ladder Diagram Representation M0033 R0001 Notice that in the
193. f the destination array For ARRAY_MOVE_BIT any reference may be used it does not need to be byte aligned However 16 bits beginning with the reference address specified are displayed on line LEN LEN specifies the number of elements starting at SR and DS that make up each array 7 1 2 Valid Memory Types E T b EIE IL LE x T E px T TE Ems 2 m 5 C C EA C C C C Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function For ARRAY_MOVE_BIT discrete user references I Q M and T need not be byte aligned Valid reference for INT BIT BYTE or WORD data only not valid for DINT Valid data type for BIT BYTE or WORD data only not valid for INT or DINT PSA SB SC only 96S cannot be used jii 9 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 77 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Example 1 In this example if R100 3 then 6R0003 RO007 of the array R0001 0016 is read and is written into 060104 RO108 of the array RO100 96RO0115 1 10001 1 1 ARRAY WORD RO001 SR DS RO100 LEN 100016 R100 SNX 00005 CONST N 00005
194. f the relational equation as in I1 lt I2 12 I2 contains a constant or reference for the second value to be compared I2 is on the right side of the relational equation as in I1 lt I2 Q Output Q is energized when I1 and I2 match the specified relation and I2 must be valid numbers i e cannot be NaN Not a Number 4 1 2 Valid Memory Types S 5 e 4 i e RS amp zZ s RS B x m E m E e 8 B 3 H Validreference or place where power may flow through the function o Valid reference for INT data only not valid for DINT or REAL Constants are limited to integer values for double precision signed integer operations Example In the following example two double precision signed integers MDE and BIN are compared whenever 9610001 is set If is less than or equal to BIN FUL coil Q0002 is turned on 510001 Q0002 I LE _ _ INT PWR_MDE I1 0 BIN FUL HI2 4 36 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 42 RANGE INT DINT WORD DWORD The RANGE function is used to determine if a value is between the range of two numbers This function is available only for Release 4 41 or later CPUs The RANGE function operates o
195. fault was due to a hard RAM failure the CPU must be replaced SA0002 OV SWP Setwhen the PLC detects that the previous sweep took longer than the time specified by the user Cleared when the PLC detects that the previous sweep did not take longer than the specified time It is also cleared during the transition from STOP to RUN mode Only valid if the PLC is in Constant Sweep mode 905 0003 APL_FLT Set when an application fault occurs Cleared when the PLC transitions from STOP to RUN mode 905 0009 Set when aconfiguration mismatch is detected during system power up or during store of the configuration Cleared by powering up the PLC when no mismatches are present or during a store of configuration that matches hardware 8 0010 HRD Set when the diagnostics detects a problem with the CPU hardware Cleared by replacing the CPU module 905 0011 LOW_BAT Set when a low battery fault occurs Cleared by replacing the battery and ensuring that the PLC powers up without the low battery condition 8 0014 LOS Set when an module stops communicating with the PLC CPU Cleared by replacing the module and cycling power on the main rack 905 0015 LOS_SIO Set when an option module stops communicating with the PLC CPU Cleared by replacing the module and cycling power on the main rack 905 0019 ADD SetwhenanI O module is added to rack Cleared by cycling power on the main rack and when the conf
196. fferences Between MCRs and Jumps below Both forms of the MCR function have the same parameters They both have an enable boolean input EN and also a name which identifies the MCR This name is used again with an ENDMCR instruction Neither the MCR nor the MCRN function has any outputs there can be nothing after an MCR in a rung Differences Between MCRs and JUMPs With an MCR function function blocks within the scope of the MCR are executed without power flow and coils are turned off In the following example when 10002 is ON the MCR is enabled When the MCR is enabled even if 9610001 is ON the ADD function block is executed without power flow i e it does not add 1 to 0001 and 00001 is turned OFF Page 4 98 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 510002 FIRST 1 ADD INT R0001 I1 RO001 1 12 ENDMCR With a JUMP function any function blocks between the JUMP and the LABEL are not executed and coils are not affected the following example when 9610002 is ON the JUMP is taken Since the logic between the JUMP and the LABEL is skipped 00001 is unaffected if it was ON it remains ON if it was OFF it remains OFF 10001 gt gt TEST1 510001 500001 a INT RO001 I1 580001 Examp
197. g input register This prefix is followed by the register address of the reference e g 10015 An analog input register holds the value of one analog input or other value AQ The prefix AQ represents an analog output register This prefix is followed by the register address of the reference e g 75A Q0056 An analog output register holds the value of one analog output or other value All register references are retained across a power cycle to the CPU Page 2 18 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 System Operation Table 2 6 Discrete References Type Description 1 The I prefix represents input references This prefix is followed by the reference s address in the input table e g 9100121 I references are located in the input status table which stores the state of all inputs received from input modules during the last input scan A reference address is assigned to discrete input modules using the configuration software or the Hand Held Programmer Until a reference address is assigned no data will be received from the module Q The Q prefix represents physical output references The coil check function of Alspa P8 25 35 05 software checks for multiple uses of Q references with relay coils or outputs on functions You can select the level of coil checking desired SINGLE WARN MULTIPLE or MULTIPLE Refer to the ALS 52201 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Programming Software f
198. gister Contents 0000000000000 Pl 231 ImPPogamComter Function Number 0 1 9 2 PLC CPU Hardware Failure RAM Failure For a RAM failure in the PLC CPU one of the faults reported as a PLC CPU hardware failure the address of the failure is stored in the first four bytes of the field 1 10 PLC Fault Time Stamp The six byte time stamp is the value of the system clock when the fault was recorded by the PLC CPU Values are coded in BCD format Table B 6 PLC Fault Time Stamp Byte Number Description 1 Seconds 2 Minutes 3 Hours 4 Day of the month 5 Month 6 Year Page B amp Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Interpreting Faults Using Alspa P8 25 35 05 Software 2 I O FAULT TABLE The following sample screen displays additional fault table information for the Addition of I O Module fault listed in the I O fault table at the beginning of this appendix This additional fault table information was displayed by positioning the cursor on the fault in the I O fault table and pressing CTRL F This screen may also be displayed by positioning the cursor on the fault and pressing the Zoom F10 key Dp E E 0 3 ADD N OF 120 MODULE 01 22 05 54 13 00 FF0000 00037F7FFF F 0702 OF 00 00 010000000000047EC5080201000000000000000000 Addition of 1 0 Module The PLC operating software generates t
199. gized if the bit tested was a 1 LEN LENis the number of words in the string to be tested 5 6 2 Valid Memory Types 1 Valid reference place where power may flow through the function ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 51 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Example In the following example whenever input 10001 is set the bit at the location contained in reference PICKBIT is tested The bit is part of string PRD_CDE If it is 1 output Q passes power flow and the coil 00001 is turned on 10001 c oe BITS TEST WORD PRD CDE IN LEN 00001 PICKBIT BIT 5 7 BSET BCLR WORD The Bit Set BSET function is used to set a bit in a bit string to 1 The Bit Clear BCLR function is used to clear a bit within a string by setting that bit to 0 Each sweep that power is received the function sets the specified bit to 1 for the BSET function or to 0 for the BCLR function If a variable register rather than a constant is used to specify the bit number the same function block can set different bits on successive sweeps A string length of 1 to 256 words can be selected The function passes power flow to the right unless the value for BIT is outside the range 1 lt BIT lt 16 LEN Then ok is set OFF enable EErEE SET WORD first word IN LEN 100001 b
200. gory faulttype address 8 faultdescription address 9 address 10 address 11 address 12 address 13 address 14 address 15 address 16 address 17 address 18 address 19 address 20 address 21 fault specific data fault specific data time stamp time stamp In the first byte of word address 1 the Long Short indicator defines the quantity of fault specific data present in the fault entry It may be PLC Fault Table 00 8 bytes short 01 24 bytes long Fault Table 02 5 bytes short 03 21 bytes long ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 115 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Example 1 In the following example when input 10251 is on and input 10250 is on the last entry in the PLC fault table is read into the parameter block When input 9610251 is off and input 10250 is on the last entry in the I O fault table is read into the parameter block The parameter block is located at location R0600 o d 510250 310251 I 1 IMOVE INT CONST IN Q 580600 00000 LEN 100001 10250 510251 1 1 MOVE_ INT CONST IN Q 380600 00001 LEN 100001 ALW ON I 1 1 Svc CONST FNC 00015 RO600 PAR
201. has anti reset windup to modify the integrator value when a CV clamp is reached Minimum Slew Time 11 A positive UINT value to define the minimum number of seconds for the CV output to move from 0 to full travel of 100 or 32000 CV Counts It is an inverse rate limit on how fast the CV output can be changed If positive CV can not change more than 32000 CV Counts times Delta Time seconds divided by Minimum Slew Time For example if the Sample Period was 2 5 seconds and the Minimum Slew Time is 500 seconds CV can not change more than 32000 2 5 500 or 160 CV Counts per PID solution As with the CV Clamps there is an anti windup feature that adjusts the integrator value if the CV rate limit is exceeded If Minimum Slew Time is 0 there is no CV rate limit Make sure you set Minimum Slew Time to 0 while you are tuning or adjusting PID loop gains Page 4 128 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Table 4 5 PID Parameters Details Continued Config Word 12 The low 4 bits of this word are used to modify three standard PID settings The other bits should be set to 0 Set the low bit to 1 to modify the standard PID Error Term from the normal SP PV to PV SP reversing the sign of the feedback term This is for Reverse Acting controls where the CV must go down when the PV goes up Set the second bit to 1 to invert the Output Polarity
202. he following example coil is ON when reference 1 is ON and reference 2 15 OFF 1 6 Negated Coil A negated coil sets a discrete reference ON when it does not receive power flow It is not retentive therefore it cannot be used with system status references SA SB SC G Example In the following example coil is ON when reference 1 is OFF 1 7 Retentive Coil M Like a normally open coil the retentive coil sets a discrete reference ON while it receives power flow The state of the retentive coil is retained across power failure Therefore it cannot be used with references from strictly non retentive memory T 1 8 Negated Retentive Coil M The negated retentive coil sets a discrete reference ON when it does not receive power flow The state of the negated retentive coil is retained across power failure Therefore it cannot be used with references from strictly non retentive memory T Page 4 4 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 1 9 Positive Transition Coil 1 If the reference associated with a positive transition coil is OFF when the coil receives power flow it is set to ON until the next time the coil is executed If the rung containing the coil is skipped on subsequent sweeps it will remain ON This coil can be used as a one shot Do not write from external devices e g PC
203. he number of words or bits to be moved For MOVE WORD and MOVE INT LEN must be between 1 and 256 words For MOVE when IN is a constant LEN must be between 1 and 16 bits otherwise LEN must be between 1 and 256 ALS 52102 On 351 and 352 CPUs the MOVE INT and MOVE WORD functions do not work properly if you allow overlapping of IN and Q parameters Also please note that the 352 CPU is the only C80 35 Floating Point CPU at this time and therefore the only one capable of MOVE REAL Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 61 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 6 1 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow 1 Q 905 G R WAT WAQ const IN o Q e Note For REAL data the only valid types are 6 AI and AQ e Valid reference for BIT INT or WORD data or place where power may flow through the function For MOVE discrete user references 961 Q M and need not be byte aligned o Valid reference for BIT or WORD data only not valid for INT SA SB SC only 96S cannot be used Example 1 When enabling input 76Q0014 is ON 48 bits are moved from memory location M0001 to memory location MO0033 Even though the destination overlaps the source for 16 bits the move is done correctly except for the 351 and 352 CPUs as noted on previously 00014 1 1 IMO
204. hem all the information contained in the fault entry 2 Perform the corrections for corrupted memory Error Code 52 Name Backplane Communications Failed Description The PLC operating software service request processor generates this error when it attempts to comply with a request that requires backplane communications and receives a rejected mail response Correction 1 Check the bus for abnormal activity 2 Replace the intelligent option module to which the request was directed 3 Check parallel programmer cable for proper attachment Error Code Others Name PLC CPU Internal System Error Description An internal system error has occurred that should not occur in a production system Correction Displaythe PLC faulttable on the programmer Contact Cegelec PLC Field Service giving them all the information contained in the fault entry Page 3 16 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Fault Explanations and Correction 2 14 Communications Failure During Store The Fault Group Communications Failure During Store occurs during the store of program blocks and other data to the PLC The stream of commands and data for storing program blocks and data starts with a special start of sequence command and terminates with end of sequence command If communications with the programming device performing the store is interrupted or any other failure occurs which terminates the lo
205. hen both fault tables have no entries 8 0010 p Set when any fault occurs that causes an entry to be placed in the PLC fault table Cleared when the PLC fault table has no entries 8 0011 IO FLT Set when any fault occurs that causes an entry to be placed in the I O fault table Cleared when the I O fault table has no entries 8 0012 SY_PRES Set as long as there is at least one entry in the PLC fault table Cleared when the PLC fault table has no entries 8 0013 IO PRES Set as long as there is at least one entry in the I O fault table Cleared when the I O fault table has no entries 905 14 HRD_FLT Set when a hardware fault occurs Cleared when both fault tables have no entries 905 15 SFT_FLT Set when a software fault occurs Cleared when both fault tables have no entries ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 23 System Operation 2 7 Function Block Structure Each rung of logic is composed of one or more programming instructions These may be simple relays or more complex functions 2 7 1 Format of Ladder Logic Relays The Alspa P8 25 35 05 software includes several types of relay functions These functions provide basic flow and control of logic in the program Examples include a normally open relay contact 1 1 and a negated coil Each of these relay contacts and coils has one input and one output Together they provide logic flow thr
206. hic representing the function Note Do not use this address with other instructions Caution Overlapping references will result in erratic operation of the timer enable Whenenablereceives power flow the timer s current value is incremented When the is notenabled the current value is reset to zero and Q is turned off PV PV is the value to copy into the timer s preset value when the timer is enabled or reset Output Q is energized when TMR is enabled and the current value is greater than or equal to the preset value 2 3 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow I WQ T 25 R 96AI 96AQ const address e mu enable a PV Q Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Example In the following example a delay timer with address TMRID is used to control the length of time that coil DWELL is on When the normally open momentary contact DO_DWL is on coil DWELL is energized The contact of coil DWELL keeps coil DWELL energized when contact DO_DWL is released and also starts the timer TMRID When TMRID reaches its preset value of one half second coil REL energizes interrupting the latched on condition of coil DWELL The contact DWELL interrupts power flow to TMRID resetting its current value and de energizing coil REL The circuit is then ready for another momentary activation of contact DO_
207. hile modifying data Once suitable PID values have been chosen they should be defined as constants in the BLKMOV so that they can be used to reload default PID user parameters if needed 9 10 4 Operation of the PID Instruction Normal Automatic operation is to call the PID block every sweep with power flow to Enable and no power flow to Manual input contacts The block compares the current PLC elapsed time clock with the last PID solution time stored in the internal RefArray If the time difference is greater than the sample period defined in the third word YoRef 2 of the RefArray the PID algorithm is solved using the time difference and both the last solution time and Control Variable output are updated In Automatic mode the output Control Variable is placed in the Manual Command parameter Ref 13 If power flow is provided to both Enable and Manual input contacts the PID block is placed in Manual mode and the output Control Variable is set from the Manual Command parameter Ref 13 If either the UP or DN inputs have power flow the Manual Command word is incremented or decremented by one CV count every PID solution For faster manual changes of the output Control Variable it is also possible to add or subtract any CV count value directly to from the Manual Command word Page 4 126 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set The PID block uses the CV Upper and CV Lower C
208. his error when an 1 0 module which had been faulted returns to operation Corrective fiction action necessary if the module uas removed or replaced or the remote rack was power cycled Update the configuration file or remove the module Next Page Down The following diagram identifies the hexadecimal information displayed in each field in the fault entry 00 FF0000 00037F7FFF7F 0702 OF 00 00 010000000000027EF00B0301000000000000000000 Fault Specific Data Fault Description Fault Type Fault Category Fault Action Fault Group Point Block Bus Slot Rack Reference Address Long Short ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page B 9 Interpreting Faults Using Alspa 8 25 35 05 Software The following paragraphs describe each field in the I O fault table Included are tables describing the range of values each field may have 2 1 Long Short Indicator This byte indicates whether the fault contains 5 bytes or 21 bytes of fault specific data Table B 7 I O Fault Table Format Indicator Byte Type Code Fault Specific Data Short 02 5 bytes Long 03 2 bytes 2 2 Reference Address Reference address is a three byte address containing the I O memory type and location or offset in that memory which corresponds to the point experiencing the fault Or when an Alspa CE80 15 block fault or
209. icro PLCs when certain failures or conditions happen which affect the operation and performance of the system These conditions such as the loss of an I O module or rack may affect the ability of the PLC to control a machine or process These conditions may also have beneficial effects such as when new module comes on line and 15 now available for use Or these conditions may only act as an alert such as a low battery signal which indicates that the battery protecting the memory needs to be changed 1 1 Alarm Processor The condition or failure itself is called a fault When a fault is received and processed by the CPU it is called an alarm The software in the CPU which handles these conditions is called the Alarm Processor The interface to the user for the Alarm Processor is through Alspa P8 programming software Any detected fault is recorded in a fault table and displayed on either the PLC fault table screen or the I O fault table screen as applicable 1 2 Classes of Faults The Alspa 80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs detect several classes of faults These include internal failures external failures and operational failures Fault Class Examples Internal Failures Non responding modules Low battery condition Memory checksum errors External I O Failures Loss of rack or module Addition of rack or module OperationalFailures Communication failures Configuration failures Password access failures For inf
210. ided by 1000 or the Ki Error dt term for the PID integrator will round down to 0 For example a very slow process that takes 10 hours or 36000 seconds to reach the 63 level should have a Sample Period of 40 seconds or longer Unless the process is very fast it is not usually necessary to use a Sample Period of 0 to solve the PID algorithm every PID sweep If many PID loops are used with a Sample Period greater than the sweep time there may be wide variations in PLC sweep time if many loops end up solving the algorithm at the same time The simple solution is to sequence one or more 1 bits through an array of bits set to 0 that is being used to enable power flow to individual PID blocks 9 10 9 Determining the Process Characteristics The PID loop gains Kp Ki and Kd are determined by the characteristics of the process being controlled Two key questions when setting up a PID loop are 1 How big is the change in PV when we change CV by a fixed amount or what is the open loop gain 2 How fast does the system respond or how quick does PV change after the CV output is stepped Many processes can be approximated by a process gain first or second order lag and a pure time delay In the frequency domain the transfer function for a first order lag system with a pure time delay is PV s CV s G s K e Tp s 1 Te s Plotting a step response at time 0 in the time domain provides an open loop unit reaction curve CV Unit S
211. ig Function SIN COS TAN ASIN ACOS ATAN The SIN COS and TAN functions are used to find the trigonometric sine cosine and tangent respectively of its input When one of these functions receives power flow it computes the sine or cosine or tangent of IN whose units are radians and stores the result in output Q Both IN and Q are floating point values The ASIN ACOS and ATAN functions are used to find the inverse sine cosine and tangent respectively of its input When one of these functions receives power flow it computes the inverse sine or cosine or tangent of IN and stores the result in output Q whose units are radians Both IN and Q are floating point values The SIN COS and TAN functions accept a broad range of input values where 263 lt IN 4283 263 FY 9 22x10 8 The ASIN and ACOS functions accept a narrow range of input values where 1 lt IN 1 Given a valid value for the IN parameter the ASIN_REAL function will produce a result Q such that ASIN IN J 2 2 2 The ACOS_REAL function will produce a result Q such that ACOS IN 0 lt Q lt Page 4 30 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set The ATAN function accepts the broadest range of input values where IN lt Given a valid value for the IN parameter the ATAN_REAL function will produce a result Q such that ATAN IN 3 Q 3 2 2 en
212. iguration matches the hardware after a store SA0020 ADD_SIO Set when an option module is added to a rack Cleared by cycling power on the main rack and when the configuration matches the hardware after a store 8 0027 SIO Set when hardware failure is detected an option module Cleared replacing the module and cycling power on the main rack SA0031 SFT_SIO Set when an unrecoverable software fault is detected in an option module Cleared by cycling power on the main rack and when the configuration matches the hardware 8 0010 BAD RAM Setwhenthe CPU detects corrupted RAM memory at power up Cleared when the CPU detects that RAM memory is valid at power up 8 0011 PWD Set when password access violation occurs Cleared when the PLC fault table is cleared when a Set when password access violation occurs Cleared when the PLC fault table is cleared access violation occurs Cleared when the PLC fault table is cleared 8 0013 Set when the CPU detects unrecoverable error in the software Cleared by clearing the PLC fault table 909 0014 STOR Set when an error occurs during a programmer store operation Cleared when a store operation is completed successfully 8 0009 ANY_FLT _FLT Set when any fault occurs Cleared when both fault tables have no entries when Set when any fault occurs Cleared when both fault tables have no entries fault occurs Cleared w
213. in rack the ST parameter must be 2610001 the END parameter must be 9010016 and the ALT parameter must be 10 as shown below The following table compares the execution times of a normal DOIO function block for an 8 point 16 point or 32 point discrete input output module with those of an enhanced DOIO function block Module Normal DOIO Execution Time Enhanced DOIO Execution Time 8 Pt Discrete Input Module 8 Pt Discrete Output Module 224 microseconds 208 microseconds 67 microseconds 48 microseconds 16 Pt Discrete Input Module 16 Pt Discrete Output Module 224 microseconds 211 microseconds 68 microseconds 47 microseconds 32 Discrete Input Module 32 Pt Discrete Output Module 247 microseconds 226 microseconds 9 microseconds 50 microseconds Page 4 96 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 3 END The END function provides a temporary end of logic The program executes from the first rung to the last rung or the END function whichever is encountered first The END function unconditionally terminates program execution There can be nothing after the end function in the rung No logic beyond the END function is executed and control is transferred to the beginning of the program for the next sweep The END function is useful for debugging purposes because it prevents any logic
214. inversion is configured and the output polarity bit in the control word is set to 0 this value will equal the CV output Ifinversion is selected and the output polarity bit is set to 1 this value will equal the negative of the CV output Diff Term Used internally for storage of intermediate values Do not write to this location Storage 19 Int Term Used internally for storage of intermediate values Do not write to this location Storage 20 21 Slew Term Storage 22 Used internally for storage of intermediate values Do not write to this location Clock 23 25 Internal elapsed time storage time last PID executed Do not write to these locations Y Remainder 26 Holds remainder for integrator division scaling for 0 steady state error Lower and Optional INT values in PV Counts that define the highest and lowest display value for the SP and Upper Range PV Logicmaster Zoom key horizontal bar graph and ADS PID faceplate display 27 28 Reserved 29 34 are reserved for internal use 35 39 are reserved for external use They are reserved for 29 34 and 35 39 Cegelec use and cannot be used for other purposes Page 4 130 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 10 5 Internal Parameters in RefArray As described ig Table 4 5 on the previous pages the PID block reads 13 user parameters and uses the rest of the 40 word RefArray for intern
215. ion are similar functions which differ in their output division finds a quotient while modulo division finds a remainder 3 1 Standard Math Functions ADD SUB MUL DIV Math functions include addition subtraction multiplication and division When a function receives power flow the appropriate math function is performed on input parameters I1 and I2 These parameters must be the same data type Output is the same data type as I1 and 12 DIV rounds down it does not round to the closest integer For example 24 DIV 5 4 Math functions operate on these types of data Data Type Description INT DINT Double precision signed integer REAL Floating Point ALS 52102 The REAL data type is only available on 352 CPUs Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 23 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set The default data type is signed integer however it can be changed after selecting the function For more information on data types please refer to chapter 2 12 Program Organization and User References Data If the operation results in overflow the output reference is set to its largest possible value for the data type For signed numbers the sign is set to show the direction of the overflow If the operation does not result in overflow the ok output is set ON otherwise it is set OFF table input parameter 11 output parameter Q input paramete
216. ired these values mustbe 0 If the PID Error SP PV or PV SP is above the value and below the value the PID calculations are solved with an Error of 0 If non zero the value must greater than 0 and the value less than or the PID block will not function You should leave these at 0 until the PID loop gains are setup or tuned After that you may want to add Dead Band to avoid small CV output changes due to small variations in error perhaps to reduce mechanical wear ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 127 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Table 4 5 PID Parameters Details Continued Data Item Description Proportional Gain Kp 05 This INT number called the Controller gain Kc in the ISA version determines the change in CV Counts for a 100 PV Count change in the Error term It is displayed as 0 00 with an implied decimal point of 2 For example a Kp entered as 450 will be displayed as 4 50 and will result in a Kp Error 100 or 450 Error 100 contribution to the PID Output Kp is generally the first gain set when adjusting a PID loop Derivative Gain Kd 06 This INT number determines the change in CV Counts if the Error or PV changes 1 PV Count every 10 milliseconds Entered as a time with the low bit indicating 10 milliseconds it is displayed as 0 00 Seconds with an implied decimal point of 2 For example a Kd enter
217. it number of IN BIT 4 52 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 5 7 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the bit operation is performed IN IN contains the first word of the data to be operated on BIT BIT contains the bit number of IN that should be set or cleared Valid range is 1 lt lt 16 LEN ok The ok output is energized whenever enable is energized LEN LEN is the number of words in the bit string 5 7 2 Valid Memory Types e Valid reference or place where power flow through the function SA SB or SC only S cannot be used Example In the following example whenever input 10001 is set bit 12 of the string beginning at reference RO0040 is set to 1 510001 I II BIT SET WORD RO040 IN LEN 100001 CONST BIT 00012 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual 4 53 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 5 8 BPOS WORD The Bit Position BPOS function is used to locate a bit set to 1 in a bit string Each sweep that power is received the function scans the bit string starting at IN When the function stops scanning either a bit equal to 1 has been found or the entire length of the string has been scanned POS is set to the positio
218. k has a length of 3 words Power Down Elapsed Seconds low order address Power Down Elapsed Seconds high order address 1 100 Microsecond ticks address 2 The first two words are the power down elapsed time in seconds The last word is the remaining power down elapsed time in 100 microsecond ticks which is always 0 Whenever the PLC can not properly calculate the power down elapsed time the time will be set to 0 This will happen when the PLC is powered up with CLR M T pressed on the HHP This will also happen if the watchdog timer times out before power down Example In the following example when input 901025 1 is ON the Elapsed Power Down Time is placed into the parameter block and the output coil 00001 is turned on The parameter block is located at R0050 10251 500001 C REQ CONST FNC 0029 580050 PARM 4 122 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 10 PID The Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative PID control function is the best known general purpose algorithm for closed loop process control The Alspa P8 PID function block compares a Process Variable feedback with a desired process Set Point and updates a Control Variable output based on the error The block uses PID loop gains and other parameters stored in an array of 4016 bit words discussed on
219. lamp parameters to limit the CV output If a positive Minimum Slew Time is defined it is used to limit the rate of change of the CV output If either the CV amplitude or rate limit 15 exceeded the value stored in the integrator is adjusted so that CV 15 at the limit This anti reset windup feature means that even if the error tried to drive CV above or below the clamps for a long period of time the CV output will move off the clamp as soon as the error term changes sign This operation with the Manual Command tracking CV in Automatic mode and setting CV in Manual mode provides a bumpless transfer between Automatic and Manual modes The CV Upper and Lower Clamps and the Minimum Slew Time still apply to the CV output in Manual mode and the internal value stored in the integrator is updated This means that if you were to step the Manual Command in Manual mode the CV output will not change any faster that the Minimum Slew Time Inverse rate limit and will not go above or below the CV Upper or CV Lower Clamp limits A specific PID function should not be called more than once per sweep The following table provides more details about the parameters discussed briefly ir Table 4 4 The number in parentheses after each parameter name is the offset in the RefArray Table 4 5 PID Parameters Details Data Item Description Loop Number 00 This is an optional parameter available to identify a PID block It is an unsigned integer that provide
220. lder functions are used For more information on program folders please refer to chapter 7 Program Folders in ALS 52201 For detailed instructions on how to lock or unlock a subroutine please refer to 8 Subroutine Blocks of chapter 3 Program Editing in ALS 52201 Page 2 32 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 System Operation Permanently Locking a Subroutine In addition to VIEWLOCK and EDITLOCK there are two types of permanent locks If a PERMVIEWLOCK lock is set all zooms into a subroutine are denied If a PERMEDITLOCK lock is set all attempts to edit the block are denied WARNING The permanent locks differ from the regular VIEWLOCK and EDITLOCK in that once set they cannot be removed Once PERMEDITLOCK is set it can only be changed to PERMVIEWLOCK A PERMVIEWLOCK cannot be changed to any other type of lock When you press the Enter key to initiate the locking the software will prompt you to confirm any permanent lock ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 33 System Operation 6 ALSPA 80 35 80 25 AND MICRO PLC SYSTEM The Alspa 80 35 80 25 and Micro PLC systems provide the interface between the Alspa 80 35 PLC user supplied devices and equipment Alspa 80 35 I O is called Model 35 I O Model 35 I O modules plug directly into slots in the CPU baseplate or into slots in any of the expansion basepl
221. le In the following example whenever 10002 allows power flow into the MCR function program execution will continue without power flow to the coils until the associated ENDMCR is reached If 10001 and 10003 are ON QO0001 is turned OFF and 00003 remains ON 10002 FIRST I I MCR 1 Q0001 Q 00003 S ENDMCR ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 99 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 5 ENDMCR Use the End Master Control Relay ENDMCR function to resume normal program execution after an MCR function When the MCR associated with the ENDMCR is active the ENDMCR causes program execution to resume with normal power flow When the MCR associated with the ENDMCR is not active the ENDMCR has no effect Alspa P8 25 35 05 software supports two forms of the ENDMCR function a non nested and a nested form The non nested form ENDMCR must be used with the non nested MCR function MCR The nested form ENDMCRN must be used with the nested MCR function MCRN The ENDMCR function has a negated boolean input EN The instruction enable must be provided by the power rail execution cannot be conditional The ENDMCR function also has a name which identifies the ENDMCR and associates it with the corresponding MCR s The ENDMCR function has no outputs there can be nothing before or after an ENDMCR instruction in a rung 127339939 i ht ar Se ENDMCRN 1 Exampl
222. lect the elapsed time since the timer was turned off When the current value CV is equal to the preset value PV the function stops passing power flow to the right When that occurs the timer stops accumulating time see Part C below When the function receives power flow again the current value resets to zero a42932 ENABLE _ C D E FG H ENABLE and both go high timer is reset CV 0 ENABLE goes low timer starts accumulating time reaches PV Q goes low and timer stops accumulating time ENABLE goes high timer is reset CV 0 ENABLE goes low timer starts accumulating time ENABLE goes high timer is reset CV 0 ENABLE goes low timer begins accumulating time reaches PV Q goes low and timer stops accumulating time ZTATHOADS I ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 15 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set enable BETHE time 0 1 0 01 0 001 Preset Value PV address 3 words When the OFDT is used in a program block that is not called every sweep the timer accumulates time between calls to the program block unless it is reset This means that it functions like a timer operating in a program with a much slower sweep than the timer in the main program block For program blocks that are inactive for a long time the timer should be programmed to
223. lspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 2 TIMERS AND COUNTERS This paragraph explains how to use on delay and stopwatch type timers up counters and down counters The data associated with these functions is retentive through power cycles Abbreviation Function Page ONDTR Retentive On Delay Timer 10 TMR Simple On Delay Timer S OFDT Off Delay Timer S UPCTR Up Counter DNCTR Down Counter 13 15 18 19 2 1 Function Block Data Required for Timers and Counters Each timer or counter uses three words registers of R memory to store the following information current value CV word 1 preset value PV word 2 control word word 3 When you enter a timer or counter you must enter a beginning address for these three words registers directly below the graphic representing the function For example enable Enum Q reset R preset value PV address Enter the beginning address here Do not use consecutive registers for the 3 word timer counter blocks Alspa 8 does not check or warn you if register blocks overlap Timers and counters will not work if you place the current value of a block on top of the preset for the previous block ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 9 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set The con
224. lspa C80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Your main job is System designer Distributor L Programmer System integrator Operator Installer If you would like a personal reply please fill in your name and address below Other specify below COMPANY eire hoa ede epo ES NAME a ADDRESS dicted eat ae dec Send this form directly to your CEGELEC sales representative or to this address Cegelec Service Documentation Produit DPI 5 avenue Newton BP 215 92142 Clamart Cedex France Fax 33 0 1 46 29 12 44 All comments will be considered by qualified personnel REMARKS Continue on back if necessary ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 9 Reader s comments Page 10 Alspa C80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Contents CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 1 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE s esee esses amat n 2 FAULT HANDLING 5 ig a ach wg aed C 1 3 3 ALSPA 80 25 80 35 C80 05 INSTRUCTION SET 1 1 3 1 Contacts Coils and Links 1 1 3 2 Timers Counters orars ar rar e RS reir a e EA E Re red 1 1 3 3 ea c poa o c
225. m Communications Window Models 331 and higher This is the part of the sweep where communications requests from intelligent option modules such as the PCM are processed see flow chart Requests are serviced on a first come first served basis However since intelligent option modules are polled in a round robin fashion no intelligent option module has priority over any other intelligent option module In the default RUN TO COMPLETION mode the length of the system communications window is limited to 50 milliseconds when the PLC is in STOP mode If an intelligent option module makes a request that requires more than 50 milliseconds to process the request is spread out over multiple sweeps so that no one sweep is impacted by more than 50 milliseconds Page 2 10 a43066 START REQUESTS IN QUEUE YES DEQUEUE A REQUEST PROCESS THE REQUEST POLLING NO STOPPED RESTART POLLING Figure 2 3 System Communications Flow Chart Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 System Operation 1 4 PCM Communications with the PLC Model 331 and higher There is no way for intelligent option modules such as the PCM to interrupt the CPU when they need service The CPU must poll each intelligent option module for service requests This polling occurs asynchronously in the background during the sweep see flow chart below When an intelligent option module is polled and
226. m Operation 3 2 Power Down System power down occurs when the power supply detects that incoming AC power has dropped for more than one power cycle or the output of the 5 volt power supply has fallen to less than 4 9 volts DC 4 CLOCKS AND TIMERS Clocks and timers provided by the Alspa C80 35 PLC include an elapsed time clock a time of day clock Model 331 341 351 352 and 28 point C80 05 Micro a watchdog timer and a constant sweep timer Two types of timer function blocks include an on delay timer and a start reset timer Four time tick contacts cycle on and off for 0 01 second 0 1 second 1 0 second and 1 minute intervals 4 1 Elapsed Time Clock The elapsed time clock uses 100 microsecond ticks to track the time elapsed since the CPU powered on The clock is not retentive across a power failure it restarts on each power up Once per second the hardware interrupts the CPU to enable a seconds count to be recorded This seconds count rolls over approximately 100 years after the clock begins timing Because the elapsed time clock provides the base for system software operations and timer function blocks it may not be reset from the user program or the programmer However the application program can read the current value of the elapsed time clock by using SVCREQ function No 16 described in chapter T9 Control Functions 4 2 Time of Day Clock Model 331 and Model 340 341 The time of day in the 28 point C80 05 Micro
227. m Present Corrupted User Program on Power Up Password Access Failure PLC CPU System Software Failure Communications Failure During Store ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 3 9 Fault Explanations and Correction 2 1 Fault Actions Fatal faults cause the PLC to enter a form of STOP mode at the end of the sweep in which the error occurred Diagnostic faults are logged and corresponding fault contacts are set Informational faults are simply logged in the PLC fault table 2 2 1055 of or Missing Option Module The Fault Group Loss of or Missing Option Module occurs when a PCM CMM or ADC fails to respond The failure may occur at power up if the module is missing or during operation if the module fails to respond The fault action for this group is Diagnostic Error Code 1 42 Name Option Module Soft Reset Failed Description PLC CPU unable to re establish communications with option module after soft reset Correction 1 Try soft reset a second time 2 Replace the option module 3 Power off the system Verify that the PCM is seated properly in the rack and that all cables are properly connected and seated 4 Replace the cables Error Code All Others Name Module Failure During Configuration Description The PLC operating software generates this error when a module fails during power up or configuration store Correction 1 Power off the system Re
228. m are relay functions which are described in chapte n Relay Functions These contacts and coils represent machine inputs and outputs and can be used to control the flow of logic through the program They enable or prevent the execution of other program functions in a rung and indicate the states of outputs The Alspa P8 software provides many types of contacts and coils for maximum programming flexibility 3 2 Timers and Counters For information about using an on delay or stopwatch type timer as well as up and down counters refer to chapter Timers and Counters Page 1 2 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Introduction 3 3 Math Math functions include addition subtraction multiplication division modulo division and square root Release 7 also provides support for floating point math with the CPU 352 only Floating point math uses the REAL data type Additional math instructions supported by the CPU 352 include trigonometric logarithmic exponential and radian conversion These functions are explained in chapter 13 Math Functions Each math function operates on two signed or double precision signed integer numbers of the same type If the numbers you are working with are not the same type for example if one is a signed integer and the other is in 4 digit BCD format you must first program one of the conversion functions described in to make the input types match 3 4 Convert Dat
229. match Group 8 Analog Expansion Mismatch 10 Unsupported Feature 23 Program exceeds memory limits Error Codes for System Bus Error Group All others System Bus Error Error Codes for Program Block Checksum Group 3 3 Program or program block checksum failure Error Codes for Low Battery Signal o 0 Failed battery on PLC CPU or other module Low battery on PLC CPU or other module Error Codes for User Application Fault Group 2 2 PLC Watchdog Timer Timed Out 5 5 COMREQ WAIT mode not available for this command 6 6 COMREQ Bad Task ID 7 7 Application Stack Overflow Error Codes for System Bus Failure Group Operating system Error Codes for Corrupted User RAM on Powerup Group 1 Corrupted User RAM on Power up 7 Illegal Boolean Opcode Detected 3 3 PLC_ISCP_PC_OVERFLOW 4 PRG_SYNTAX_ERR Error Codes for PLC CPU Hardware Faults All codes PLC CPU Hardware Failure ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page B 7 Interpreting Faults Using Alspa 8 25 35 05 Software 1 9 Fault Extra Data This field contains details of the fault entry Two examples of such data are given below 1 9 1 Corrupted User RAM Group Four of the error codes in the System Configuration Mismatch group supply fault extra data Table 5 PLC Fault Data Illegal Boolean Opcode Detected Fault Extra Data Model Number Mismatch ASCP Fault Re
230. measurements were taken with an empty program and the default configuration The Alspa C80 35 PLCs were in an empty 10 slot rack with no extension racks connected 5 The data input time for the Micro PLC can be determined as follows 0 365 ms fixed scan 0 036 ms filter time x total sweep time 0 5 ms 6 Since the Micro PLC has a static set of I O reconfiguration is not necessary 7 Since the user program for the Micro PLC is in Flash memory it will not be checked for integrity Page 2 4 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 System Operation Table 2 2 I O Scan Time Contribution for Alspa 80 35 Modules in milliseconds CPU Model 331 341 Module Type 311 313 Main Expansion Remote Main Expansion Remote Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack 8 point discrete input 0 076 0 054 0 095 0 255 0 048 0 089 0 249 16 point discrete input 0 075 0 055 0 097 0 257 0 048 0 091 0 250 32 point discrete input 0 094 0 094 0 126 0 335 0 073 0 115 0 321 8 point discrete output 0 084 0 059 0 097 0 252 0 053 0 090 0 246 16 point discrete output 0 083 0 061 0 097 0 253 0 054 0 090 0 248 32 point discrete output 0 109 0 075 0 129 0 333 0 079 0 114 0 320 8 point combination input output 0 165 0 141 0 218 0 529 0 098 0 176 0 489 4 channel analog input 0 151 0 132 0 183 0 490 0 117
231. ment is in tenth 0 1 hundredths 0 01 or thousandths 0 001 of seconds for the low bit of the PV preset and CV current value 2 2 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter now M 5 AT AQ const none MAMMA pepe ee ee S m 8 e Valid reference place where power may flow through the function Example In the following example a retentive on delay timer is used to create a signal 76Q0011 that turns on 8 0 seconds after 900010 turns on and turns off when 00010 turns off 00080 580004 4 12 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 23 TMR The simple on delay timer TMR function increments while it receives power flow and resets to zero when power flow stops Time may be counted in tenths of a second the default selection hundredths of a second or thousandths of a second The range is 0 to 32767 time units The state of this timer is retentive on power failure no automatic initialization occurs at power up When the TMR receives power flow the timer starts accumulating time current value The current value is updated when it is encountered in the logic to reflect the total elapsed time the timer has been enabled since it was last reset Note If multiple occurrences of the same timer with the same
232. n Logical OR 2 0 13 Logical Exclusive OR 1 0 13 Logical Invert NOT 1 0 10 Shift Bit Left 31 1 1 37 16 Shift Bit Right 28 0 3 03 16 Rotate Bit Left 25 0 3 12 16 Rotate Bit Right 25 0 4 14 16 Bit Position 20 1 13 Bit Clear 20 0 13 Bit Test 20 0 13 Bit Set 19 1 13 Mask Compare WORD 46 0 25 Mask Compare DWORD 48 0 25 Page A 6 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Instruction Timing Table A 1 Instruction Timing Continued Function Enabled Disabled Increment Group Function 351 352 351 352 351 352 Size Data Move Move INT 0 0 0 41 10 Move BIT 28 0 4 98 13 Move WORD 1 1 0 41 10 Move REAL 352 only 24 1 0 82 13 Block Move INT 3 0 28 Block Move WORD 3 0 28 Block Move REAL 36 0 13 Block Clear 1 0 0 24 11 Shift Register BIT 46 0 0 23 16 Shift Register WORD 27 0 0 41 16 Bit Sequencer 38 22 0 02 16 Table Array Move INT 54 0 0 97 22 DINT 54 0 0 81 22 BIT 69 0 0 36 22 BYTE 54 1 0 64 22 WORD 54 0 0 97 22 Search Equal INT 37 0 0 62 19 DINT 41 1 1 38 22 35 0 0 46 19 WORD 37 0 0 62 19 Search Not Equal INT 37 0 0 62 19 DINT 38 0 2 14 22 37 0 0 47 19 WORD 37 0 0 62 19 Search Greater Than INT 37 0 1 52 19 DINT 39 0 2 26 22 BYTE 36 1 1 24 19 WORD 37 0 1 52 19 Search Greater Than Equal INT 37 0 1 48 19 DINT 39 0 2 33 22 BYTE 37 1 1 34 19 WORD 37 0 1 48 19 Search Less Than INT 37 0 1 5
233. n the main rack and Bus Receiver Modules in the expansion racks 2 5 Slot The slot number ranges from 0 to 9 The PLC CPU always occupies slot 1 in the main rack rack 0 2 6 Point Point ranges from 1 to 1024 decimal It tells which point on the block has the fault when the fault is a point type fault 2 7 I O Fault Group Fault group is the highest classification of a fault It identifies the general category of the fault The fault description text displayed by Alspa P8 25 35 05 software is based on the fault group and the error codes Table B 10 lists the possible fault groups in the I O fault table Group numbers less than 80 Hex are maskable faults The Additional I O Fault Codes group is declared for the handling of new fault conditions in the system without the PLC having to specifically know the alarm codes All unrecognized I O type alarm codes belong to this group Table B 10 I O Fault Groups Group Number Group Name Fault Action 3 Loss of or missing I O module Diagnostic 7 Addition of or extra I O module Diagnostic 9 IOC or I O bus fault Diagnostic A module fault Diagnostic Additional I O fault codes As specified ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page B 11 Interpreting Faults Using Alspa 8 25 35 05 Software 2 8 TO Fault Action The fault action specifies what action the PLC CPU should take when a fault occu
234. n these types of data Description Signed integer Double precision signed integer Word data type The default data type is signed integer however it can be changed after selecting the function For more information on data types please refer to chapter 4 12 Program Organization and User References Data When the function is enabled the RANGE function block will compare the value in input parameter IN against the range specified by limit parameters L1 and L2 When the value is within the range specified by L1 and L2 inclusive output parameter Q is set ON 1 Otherwise Q is set OFF 0 enable Ed INT limit parameter L1 L1 output parameter limit parameter 12 12 value to compared IN Limit parameters L1 and L2 represent the end points of a range There is no minimum maximum or high low connotation assigned to either parameter Thus a desired range of 0 to 100 could be specified by assigning 0 to L1 and 100 to L2 or 0 to L2 and 100 to L1 4 2 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed L1 L1 contains the start point of the range L2 L2contains the end point of the range IN INcontains the value to be compared against the range specified by L1 and L2 H Gf Output Q is energized when the value in IN is within the range specified by L1 and L2 inclusive ALS 52102 Alspa 80
235. n within the bit string of the first non zero bit POS is set to zero if no non zero bit is found A string length of 1 to 256 words can be selected The function passes power flow to the right whenever enable is ON enable Emi first word position of non zero bit or 0 5 8 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled a bit search operation is performed IN IN contains the first word of the data to be operated on ok The ok output is energized whenever enable is energized POS The position of the first non zero bit found or zero if a non zero bit is not found LEN LENis the number of words in the bit string 5 8 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow 9 1 Q 905 G R WAT WAQ const enable IN e e e e 5 ok Valid reference place where power may flow through the function Page 4 54 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Example In the following example if 10001 is set the bit string starting at M0001 is searched until a bit equal to 1 is found or 6 words have been searched Coil 00001 is turned on If a bit equal to 1 is found its location within the bit string is written to 76AQ001 If 7010001 is set bit 0001 is 0 and bit M0002 is 1 then the value written to 9 is 2 510001
236. nction will not run until enough sweeps have occurred to accumulate an elapsed time of 10 milliseconds e g if the sweep time is 9 milliseconds the PID function will execute every other sweep with an elapsed time of 18 milliseconds for every time it executes ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 123 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 10 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When enabled through a contact the PID function is performed SP SP is the control loop or process set point Set using PV Counts the PID adjusts the output CV so that PV matches SP zero error PV Process Variable input from the process being controlled often a AI input MAN Whenenergized to 1 through acontact the PID block isin MANUAL mode If the PID block is on manual off the PID block is in automatic mode UP If energized along with MAN it adjusts the CV up by 1 CV per solution DN If energized along with MAN it adjusts the CV down by 1 CV per solution RefArray Address is the location of the PID control block information user and internal parameters Uses 40 R Address words that cannot be shared ok The ok output is energized when the function is performed without error It is off if error s exist CV CV is the control variable output to the process often a AQ analog output ncremented UP parameter or decremented DN parameter by one
237. nd Status menu or from another PLC Status functions screen The programmer may be in any operating mode If the programmer is in OFFLINE mode no faults are displayed In ONLINE or MONITOR mode PLC fault data is displayed In ONLINE mode faults can be cleared this may be password protected Once cleared faults which are still present are not logged again in the table except for the Low Battery fault Page 3 6 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Fault Explanations and Correction 1 8 I O Fault Table Display The I O Fault Table screen displays I O faults such as circuit faults address conflicts forced circuits and I O bus faults For example PROGRN TABLES SETUP FOLDER UTILTY PRINT SED gt 1 0 FAULT TABLE TOP FAULT DISPLAYED 00002 TABLE LAST CLEARED 01 21 08 26 37 TOTAL FAULTS 00002 ENTRIES OVERFLOWED 00000 FAULT DESCRIPTION PLC DATE TIME 01 22 05 54 48 FAULT CIRC REFERENCE FAULT FAULT DATE TIME LOCATION NO CATEGORY ADD N OF 1 0 MODULE 01 22 05 54 13 0 3 0 3 ADD N OF 1 0 MODULE 01 22 05 54 02 ID STOP NO 10 ONLINE 4 ACC WRITE LOGIC ONFIG EQUAL NPSNLESSON PRG LESSON REPLACE To display the I O Fault Table screen press I O Fault F4 from the PLC Control and Status menu or from another PLC Status functions screen The programmer may be in any operating mode If
238. nks Horizontal Link amp HO Vertical Link amp VE Timers On Delay Timer amp ON Timer Elapsed amp TM Off Delay Timer amp OF Counters Up Counter amp UP amp UP Down Counter amp DN amp DN ALS 52102 c en Alspa C80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page C 1 Instruction Mnemonics Function Mnemonic Group Instruction All BCD 4 INT DINT BIT BYTE WORD REAL Math Addition amp AD amp AD_I amp AD_DI amp AD_R Subtraction amp SUB amp SUB_I amp SUB_DI amp SUB_R Multiplication amp MUL amp MUL_I amp MUL_DI amp MUL_R Division amp DIV amp DIV_I amp DIV_DI amp DIV_R Modulo amp MOD amp MOD_I amp MOD_DI amp MOD_R amp Square Root amp SQ amp 50 450 DI SQR Sine amp SIN Cosine amp COS Tangent amp TAN Inverse Sine amp ASIN Inverse Cosine amp ACOS Inverse Tangent amp ATAN Base 10 Logarithm amp LOG Natural Logarithm amp LN Power of e amp EXP Power of x amp EXPT Relational Equal amp EQ amp EQ I amp EQ DI amp EQ R Not Equal amp NE amp NE I amp NE DI amp NE R Greater Than amp GT amp GT I amp GT DI amp GT R Greater or Equal amp GE amp GE I amp GE DI amp GE R Less Than amp LT amp LT I amp LT DI amp LT R Less Than or Equal amp LE amp LE I amp LE DI amp LE R Bit AND amp AN amp AN W Operation OR amp OR amp OR W Exclusive OR amp XO amp XO W NOT amp NOT amp NOT W Bit Shift Left amp SHL amp SHL W Bit Shift Right amp SHR amp SHR W Bit Rotate Left
239. notation with a display of six significant digits In this manual the terms floating point and REAL used interchangeably to describe the floating point number display entry feature of Alspa P8 software In Alspa P8 software the following format is used For numbers in the range 9999999999 to 0 0001 the display has no exponent and up to six or seven significant digits For example Entered Displayed Description 0 000123456789 0 0001234567 Ten digits six or seven significant 12 345e 2 0 1234500 Seven digits six or seven significant 1234 1234 000 Seven digits six or seven significant ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page E 1 Using Floating Point Numbers Outside the range listed above only six significant digits are displayed and the display has the form 1 23456 12 Exponent signed power of 10 Exponent indicator and sign of exponent Five less significant digits Decimal point t Most significant digit Sign of the entire number 2 VALUES OF FLOATING POINT NUMBERS Use the following table to calculate the value of a floating point number from the binary number stored in two registers Exponent e Mantissa f Value of Floating Point Number 255 Non zero Not a valid number NaN 255 0 0 lt
240. ns window The programmer communications window will not execute if there is no programmer attached and no board to be configured in the system Only one board is configured each sweep Support is provided for the Hand Held Programmer and for other programmers that can connect to the serial port and use the Serial Network Protocol SNP protocol Support is also provided for programmer communications with intelligent option modules In the default limited window mode the CPU performs one operation for the programmer each sweep that is it honors one service request or response to one key press If the programmer makes a request that requires more than 6 milliseconds to process the request processing is spread out over several sweeps so that no sweep is impacted by more than 6 milliseconds The following figure is a flow chart for the programmer communications portion of the sweep 245028 START P8 HAND HELD PROGRAMMER PROGRAMMER ATTACHED ATTACHED PROGRAMMER ATTACHED STATUS PREVIOUS STATUS PREVIOUS STATUS NOT ATTACHED NOT e ATTACHED ATTACHED ATTACHED PROGRAMMER ABORT SETUP FOR REQUEST OPERATION HAND HELD IN PROGRESS PROGRAMMER PROCESS REQUEST SETUP FOR SEND INITIAL PROCESS KEY SNE DISPLAY PROTOCOL Figure 2 2 Programmer Communications Window Flow Chart ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 9 System Operation 1 3 Syste
241. nt is placed in the memory location specified by Q and the locations following up to the length specified For example if the constant value 9 is specified for IN and the length is 4 then 9 is placed in the memory location specified by Q and the three locations following Page 4 60 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set The LEN operand specifies the number of Words to be moved for MOVE INT and MOVE WORD Bits to be moved for MOVE Reals to be moved for MOVE REAL The REAL data type is only available on 352 CPUs The function passes power to the right whenever power is received enable ELENMN ok INT value to be moved output parameter LEN 100001 6 1 1 Parameters Parameter enable IN ok Q LEN Description When the function is enabled the move is performed IN contains the value to be moved For MOVE BIT any discretereference may be used it does not need to be byte aligned However 16 bits beginning with the reference address specified are displayed online The ok output is energized whenever the function is enabled Whenthe move is performed the value at IN is written to Q For MOVE BIT any discrete reference may be used it does not need to be byte aligned However 16 bits beginning with the reference address specified are displayed online LEN specifies t
242. ntact 2680007 ALW ON Always ON S0008 ALW_OFF Always OFF 80009 SY FULL Set when the PLC fault table fills up Cleared when an entry is removed from the PLC fault table and when the PLC fault table is cleared S0010 IO_FULL Set when the I O fault table fills up Cleared when an entry is removed from the I O fault table and when the I O fault table is cleared 50011 OVR Set when an override exists 901 Q G memory 80013 PRG Set when background program check is active S0014 PLC_BAT Set to indicate a bad battery in a Release 4 or later CPU The contact reference is updated once per sweep S0017 SNPXACT SNP X host is actively attached to the CPU 50018 SNPX RD SNP X host has read data from the CPU 92680019 SNPX WT SNP X host has written data to the CPU 2680020 Set ON when a relational function using REAL data executes successfully It is cleared when either input is NaN Not a Number 7080032 Reserved for use by the Alspa 8 25 35 05 software Page 2 22 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 System Operation Table 2 8 System Status References Continued Reference Nickname Definition 8 0001 50 Set when checksum calculated on the application program does not match the reference checksum If the fault was due to a temporary failure the discrete bit can be cleared by again storing the program to the CPU If the
243. nual Page 4 27 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 3 2 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow enable D ok Q Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Valid reference for INT data only not valid for DINT T Constants are limited to values between 32768 and 32767 for double precision signed integer operations Example In the following example the remainder of the integer division of BOXES into PALLETS is placed into NT FULL whenever 2610001 is ON 1510001 1 1 1 1 MOD_ INT PALLETS I1 Q NT FULL 00017 0005 BOXES I2 0006 4 28 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 3 3 SQRT INT DINT The Square Root SQRT function is used to find the square root of a value When the function receives power flow the value of output Q is set to the integer portion of the square root of the input IN The output Q must be the same data type as IN The SQRT function operates on these types of data Data Type Description INT Signed integer DINT Double precision signed integer REAL Floating Point The REAL data type is only available on 352 CPUs The default data type is signed integer however it can be changed after selecting the function For more information on data types please refer to chapter 4 12 Program O
244. of numbers that can be stored in this format is from 1 401298 45 to 3 402823E 38 and the number Zero ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page E 3 Using Floating Point Numbers 3 ERRORS IN FLOATING POINT NUMBERS AND OPERATIONS Overflow occurs when a number greater than 3 402823E 38 or less than 3 402823E 38 is generated by a REAL function When this occurs the ok output of the function is set OFF and the result is set to positive infinity for a number greater than 3 402823E 38 or negative infinity for a number less than 3 402823E 38 You can determine where this occurs by testing the sense of the ok output POS_INF 7F800000h IEEE positive infinity representation in hex NEG INF FF800000h IEEE negative infinity representation in hex If the infinities produced by overflow are used as operands to other REAL functions they may cause an undefined result This undefined result is referred to as an NaN Not a Number For example the result of adding positive infinity to negative infinity is undefined When the ADD REAL function is invoked with positive infinity and negative infinity as its operands it produces an NaN for its result Each REAL function capable of producing an NaN produces a specialized NaN which identifies the function NaN ADD 7F80FFFFh Real addition error value in hex NaN SUB 7F81FFFFh Real subtraction error value in hex NaN_MUL 7F82
245. of the scanned inputs is placed in internal memory from reference 0001 to M0064 The real input points are not updated This form of the function can be used to compare the current values of input points with the values of input points at the beginning of the scan ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 93 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Input Example 2 In the following example when the enabling input 10001 is ON references 10001 to 10064 are scanned and 26Q0001 is turned The scanned inputs are placed in the input status memory from reference 10001 to 10064 This form of the function allows input points to be scanned one or more times during the program execution portion of the CPU sweep 10001 10001 10064 Output Example 1 In the following example when the enabling input 9610001 is ON the values at references R0001 to RO004 are written to analog output channels 0001 to 0004 and 00001 is turned on The values at 0001 to 26A Q004 are not written to the analog output modules Page 4 94 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Output Example 2 In the following example when the enabling input 10001 is ON the values at references 96 1 40004 are written to analog output channels 0001 to AQ004 and 0
246. option module Diagnostic 11 B System configuration mismatch Fatal 12 System bus error Diagnostic 13 D PLC CPU hardware failure Fatal 14 E Non fatal module hardware failure Diagnostic 16 10 Option module software failure Diagnostic 17 11 Program block checksum failure Fatal 18 12 Low battery signal Diagnostic 19 13 Constant sweep time exceeded Diagnostic 20 14 PLC system fault table full Diagnostic 21 15 fault table full Diagnostic 22 16 User Application fault Diagnostic Additional PLC fault codes As specified 128 80 System bus failure Fatal 129 81 No user s program on power up Informational 130 82 Corrupted user RAM detected Fatal 132 84 Password access failure Informational 135 87 PLC CPU software failure Fatal 137 89 PLC sequence store failure Fatal 1 7 Fault Action Each fault may have one of three actions associated with it These fault actions are fixed on the Alspa 80 35 PLC and cannot be changed by the user Table B 2 PLC Fault Actions Fault Action Informational Diagnostic Fatal Action Taken by CPU Log fault in fault table Log fault in fault table Set fault references Log fault in fault table Set fault references Go to STOP mode ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 5 Interpreting Faults Using Alspa 8 25 35 05 Software 1 8 Error Code The error code further describes the fault Each fault gro
247. or Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs User s Manual for more information about this feature The Q prefix is followed by the reference s address in the output table e g 70000016 Q references are located in the output status table which stores the state of the output references as last set by the application program This output status table s values are sent to output modules at the end of the program scan A reference address is assigned to discrete output modules using the configuration software or the Hand Held Programmer Until a reference address is assigned no data is sent to the module A particular Q reference may be either retentive or non retentive M The M prefix represents internal references The coil check function of Alspa P8 25 35 05 software checks for multiple uses of M references with relay coils or outputs on functions You can select the level of coil checking desired SINGLE WARN MULTIPLE or MULTIPLE Refer to the ALS 52201 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa C80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs User s Manual for more information about this feature A particular M reference may be either retentive or non retentive T The T prefix represents temporary references These references are never checked for multiple coil use and can therefore be used many times in the same program even when coil use checking is enabled T may be used to prevent coil use conflicts while using the cut past
248. or DINT 4 80 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Example 1 The array AR is defined as memory addresses 0001 0005 When EN is ON the portion of the array between R0004 and 6RO0005 is searched for an element whose value is equal to IN If RO001 7 RO002 9 RO0003 6 RO0004 7 0005 7 and 6R0100 7 then the search will begin at R0004 and conclude at 0004 when FD is set ON and 4 is written to RO101 510001 1 1 I ISRCH EQ INT 380001 AR FD LEN 1000051 CONST NX NX 580101 00003 80100 IN Example 2 Array AR is defined as memory addresses AI001 1016 The values of the array elements are 100 20 0 5 90 200 0 79 102 80 24 34 987 8 0 and 500 Initially 7AQO01 is 5 When EN is ON each sweep will search the array looking for a match to the IN value of 0 The first sweep will start searching at 1006 and find a match at AI007 so FD is ON and AQO01 is 7 The second sweep will start searching at 1008 and find a match at 96 AIO15 so FD remains ON and 0AQ001 is 15 The next sweep will start at 96 1016 Since the end of the array is reached without a match FD is set OFF and 0001 is set to zero The next sweep will start searching at the beginning of the array 1 10001
249. ormation specific to Alspa C80 05 Micro PLC fault handling refer to chapter 7 of the ALS 52119 Alspa 80 05 Micro PLC User s Manual Page 3 2 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Fault Explanations and Correction 1 3 System Reaction to Faults Typically hardware failures require that either the system be shut down or the failure is tolerated I O failures may be tolerated by the PLC system but they may be intolerable by the application or the process being controlled Operational failures are normally tolerated Alspa 80 35 80 25 and Micro PLC faults have two attributes Attribute Description Fault Table Affected T O fault table PLC fault table Fault Action Fatal Diagnostic Informational 1 3 1 Fault Tables Two fault tables are maintained in the PLC for logging faults the I O fault table for logging faults related to the I O system and the PLC fault table for logging all other faults The following table lists the fault groups their fault actions the fault tables affected and the nickname for system discrete 905 points that are affected Table 3 1 Fault Summary Fault Fault Fault Group Action Table Special Discrete Fault References Loss LossoforMissig O Module DE I O Module ae CNN C VO Fault Table Full Diagnostic Unknown PLC Fault PLC syft awf AL
250. ot occur until the end of the sweep in which the function executes T00001 ex gt gt END_PRG END_PRG END OF PROGRAM LOGIC To ensure that the 7580002 LST_SCN contact will operate correctly the PLC will execute one additional sweep after the sweep in which the function SVCREQ 13 was executed ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 113 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 9 6 SVCREQ 14 Clear Fault Tables Use SVCREQ function 14 in order to clear either the PLC fault table or the I O fault table The SVCREQ output is set ON unless some number other than 0 1 is entered as the requested operation see below For this function the parameter block has a length of 1 word It is an input parameter block only 0 clear PLC fault table address 1 clear I O fault table Example In the following example when input 10346 is on and input 10349 is on the PLC fault table is cleared When input 10347 is on and input 10349 is on the I O fault table is cleared When input 10348 is on and input 10349 is on both are cleared The parameter block for the PLC fault table is located at RO500 for the I O fault table the parameter block is located at RO550 Both parameter blocks are set up elsewhere in the program 10349 510346 I II 1 1 _ _ 510348 4 CONST FNC 00014
251. ou can choose whether or not the I O is scanned I O scans may execute in STOP mode if the IOScan Stop parameter on the CPU detail screen is set to YES Refer to chapter 10 in the ALS 52201 Alspa 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa C80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs User s Manual for more information Communications with the programmer and intelligent option modules continue In addition faulted board polling and board reconfiguration execution continue while in STOP mode For efficiency the operating system uses larger time slice values than those used in RUN mode usually about 50 milliseconds per window 1 6 Key Switch on 351 352 CPUs Change Mode and Flash Protect The 351 CPU has a key switch on the front of the module that allows you to protect Flash memory from being over written When you turn the key to the ON RUN position no one can change the Flash memory without turning the key to the OFF position Beginning with Release 7 of the 351 CPU and the 352 CPU the same Key Switch has another function it allows you to switch the PLC into STOP mode into RUN mode and to clear non fatal faults as discussed in the next section 1 6 1 Using the Release 7 and Later Key Switch Unlike the Flash Protection capabilities in the earlier release if you do not enable the Key Switch through the RUN STOP Key Switch parameter in the CPU s configuration screen the CPU does not have the enhanced control discussed here refer to chapter 10 5 3
252. ou want to start the next comparison at some other location in the string you can enter different references for BIT and BN If the value of BIT is a location that is beyond the end of the string BIT is reset to 0 before starting the next comparison If All Bits in and I2 are the Same If all corresponding bits in strings and I2 match the function sets the output MC to 0 and BN to the highest bit number in the input strings The comparison then stops On the next invocation of MSKCMPW it will be reset to 0 If a Miscompare is Found When the two bits currently being compared are not the same the function checks the correspondingly numbered bit in string M the mask If the mask bit is a 1 the comparison continues until it reaches another miscompare or the end of the input strings If a miscompare is detected and the corresponding mask bit is a 0 the function does the following 1 Sets the corresponding mask bit in M to 1 2 Sets the miscompare MC output to 1 3 Updates the output bit string Q to match the new content of mask string M 4 Sets the bit number output BN to the number of the miscompared bit 5 Stops the comparison Page 4 56 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set esate ELE WORD input parameter I1 I1 MC miscompare LEN 100001 input parameter 12 12 output p
253. ough the contact or coil Each relay contact or coil must be given a reference which is entered when selecting the relay For a contact the reference represents a location in memory that determines the flow of power into the contact In the following example if reference 10122 is ON power will flow through this relay contact 10122 For a coil the reference represents a location in memory that is controlled by the flow of power into the coil In this example if power flows into the left side of the coil reference 00004 is turned ON 500004 Alspa 8 25 35 05 software and the Hand Held Programmer both have a coil check function that checks for multiple uses of Q or M references with relay coils or outputs on functions You can select the level of coil checking desired SINGLE WARN MULTIPLE or MULTIPLE Refer to the ALS 52201 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs User s Manual the ALS 52202 Hand Held Programmer for Alspa 80 35 80 25 C80 05 PLCs User s Manual for more information about this feature 2 7 2 Format of Program Function Blocks Some functions are very simple like the MCR function which is shown with the abbreviated name of the function within brackets MCR 1 Other functions are more complex They may have several places where you will enter information to be used by the function The function block illustrated below is multiplication MUL Its
254. ovides four time tick contacts with time durations of 0 01 second 0 1 second 1 0 second and 1 minute The state of these contacts does not change during the execution of the sweep These contacts provide a pulse having an equal on and off time duration The contacts are referenced as T 10MS 0 01 second T 100MS 0 1 second SEC 1 0 second and T MIN 1 minute The following timing diagram represents the on off time duration of these contacts 243071 X SEC x 2 SEC SEC Figure 2 6 Time Tick Contact Timing Diagram Page 2 30 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 System Operation 5 SYSTEM SECURITY Security in the Alspa 35 and Alspa 80 25 PLCs is designed to prevent unauthorized changes to the contents of a PLC There are four security levels available in the PLC The first level which is always available provides only the ability to read PLC data no changes are permitted to the application The other three levels have access to each level protected by a password The information in this paragraph is also applicable to the Alspac 80 05 Micro PLC Each higher privilege level permits greater change capabilities than the lower level s Privilege levels accumulate in that the privileges granted at one level are a combination of that level plus all lower levels The levels and their privileges are Privilege Level Description Level 1 Any data excep
255. p SET S ON Set reference ON until reset OFF by R OFF Do not change the coil state RESET R ON Set reference OFF until set ON by S OFF Do not change the coil state Retentive SET SM ON Set reference ON until reset OFF by RM retentive OFF Do not change the coil state Retentive RM ON Set reference OFF until set ON by SM retentive RESET OFF Do not change the coil state Continuation ON Set next continuation contact ON Coil OFF Set next continuation contact OFF 1 3 Normally Open Contact A normally open contact acts as a switch that passes power flow if the associated reference is ON 1 1 4 Normally Closed Contact A normally closed contact acts as a switch that passes power flow if the associated reference is OFF 0 Example The following example shows a rung with 10 elements having nicknames from 1 to E10 Coil E10 is ON when references E2 E5 and E9 are ON and references E4 E7 and E8 are OFF E3 EA E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 1 1 1 1 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 3 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 1 5 Coil A coil sets a discrete reference ON while it receives power flow It is non retentive therefore it cannot be used with system status references SA SB SC or G Example In t
256. pa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Introduction 3 14 Additional Reference Information Appendi lists the memory size in bytes and the execution time in microseconds for each programming instruction described in chapter 4 Appendix B describes how to interpret the message structure format when reading the PLC and I O fault tables Refer to appendix for a listing of the instruction mnemonics used with Alspa P8 25 35 05 software Refer to appendix for a listing of the special keyboard assignments used with Alspa 8 25 35 05 software ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 1 5 Introduction Page 1 6 Alspa 80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Chapter System Operation 2 This chapter describes certain system operations of Alspa C80 35 PLC Alspa 80 25 PLC and C80 05 Micro PLCs These system operations include A summary of PLC sweep sequences see 1 Program organization and user references data see and power down sequences see p Clocks and timers see System security through password assignment see Model 35 I O modules see T9 Model 25 and Micro I O see 9 1 PLCSWEEP SUMMARY The logic program in the Alspa C80 35 Alspa C80 25 and Micro PLCs execute repeatedly until stopped by a command from the programmer or a command from ano
257. parts are typical of many Alspa P8 25 35 05 program functions The upper part of the function block shows the name of the function It may also show a data type in this case signed integer This is the function block name MUL and data type INT INT signed integer represents the type and size of data to be acted on Page 2 24 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 System Operation Many program functions allow you to select the data type for the function after selecting the function For example the data type for the MUL function could be changed to double precision signed integer Additional information on data types is provided earlier in this chapter 2 7 3 Function Block Parameters Each line entering the left side of a function block represents an input for that function There are two forms of input that can be passed into a function block they are constants and references A constant is an explicit value A reference is the address of a value In the following example input parameter I1 comes into the ADD function block as constant and input parameter 12 comes in as a reference 510001 00001 1 1 1 1 ADD 2 INT CONST 11 Q R0002 400010 580001 2 Each line exiting the right side of the function block represents an output
258. place the module located in that rack and slot 2 3 Reset of Addition of or Extra Option Module The Fault Group Reset of Addition of or Extra Option Module occurs when an option module PCM ADC etc comes on line is reset or a module is found in the rack but none is specified in the configuration The fault action for this group is Diagnostic Three bytes of fault specific data provide additional information regarding the fault Correction 1 Update the configuration file to include the module 2 Remove the module from the system Page 3 10 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Fault Explanations and Correction 2 4 System Configuration Mismatch The Fault Group Configuration Mismatch occurs when the module occupying a slot is different from that specified in the configuration file The fault action is Fatal Error Code 1 Name System Configuration Mismatch Description The PLC operating software system configurer generates this fault when the module occupying a slot is not of the same type that the configuration file indicates should be in that slot or when the configured rack type does not match the actual rack present Correction Identify the mismatch and reconfigure the module or rack Error Code 6 Name System Configuration Mismatch Description This is the same as error code 1 in that this fault occurs when the module occupying a slot i
259. plied by 100 and entered as integer while Ki can be multiplied by 1000 and entered into the User Parameter RefArray ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 135 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 10 12 Sample PID Call The following PID example has a Sample Period of 100 Msec a Kp gain of 4 00 and a Ki gain of 1 500 The Set Point is stored in R1 with the Control Variable output AQ2 and the Process Variable returned in AI3 CV Upper and CV Lower Clamps must be set in this case to 20000 and 4000 and an optional small Dead Band of 5 and 5 has been included The 40 word RefArray starts in R100 Normally User Parameters are set in the RefArray with the PID Zoom key F10 but M6 can be set to reinitialize the 14 words starting at 70R102 Ref 2 from constants stored in logic a useful technique M00006 CLR WORD R00100 IN LEN 00035 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000 R00012 2 CO 0 0 0 0 0 00000 M00001 R00001 AI0003 M00002 R00113 R00002 Page 4 136 M00004 M00004 M00003 R00113 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual DN R00100 R00109
260. power is received enable ENSNEN ee WORD input parameter I1 11 0 output parameter 0 5 3 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed 1 11 T contains the constant or reference for the word to be negated 1 ok The ok output is energized whenever enable is energized Q Output Q contains NOT negation ofll 5 3 2 Valid Memory Types Lp Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function SA SB or SC only 96S cannot be used Example In the following example whenever input 10001 is set the bit string represented by the nickname is set to the inverse of bit string CAT 10001 I I II NOT WORD 11 Page 4 46 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 5 4 SHL and SHR WORD The Shift Left SHL function is used to shift all the bits in a word or group of words to the left by a specified number of places When the shift occurs the specified number of bits is shifted out of the output string to the left As bits are shifted out of the high end of the string the same number of bits is shifted in at the low end LSB The Shift Right SHR function is used to shif
261. pplication Fault balan dad ege e ERR DR E ERR aM 3 13 2 10 No User Program Present 3 11 2 11 Corrupted User Program on Power Up 3 1 2 12 Password Access Failure a 2 13 PLC CPU System Software Failure 3 17 2 14 Communications Failure During Store 3 4 3 FAULT TABLE EXPLANATIONS 3 19 3 1 Loss ot Module ccc ee bee 3 147 3 2 Addition of I O 3 197 CHAPTER 4 ALSPA 8 25 35 05 INSTRUCTION SET 4 1 l RELAY FUNCTIONS mobi eR a eres d aac pa E dcs 4 2 1 1 Using Contacts 2464 44 04 ombre Ee perd ERROR 4 7 1 2 Using Coils csse sepe Lg aec an pas b o d E nde d 47 1 3 Normally Open Contact l 4 1 1 4 Normally Closed Contact l 4 1 1 5 Coll uus oes UR Se ote oet a EU DR E aba E ende 40 1 6 Coil 45s ek pem RR Xa E RR peg a 4 4 1 7 Retentive Coil M 4 4 1 8 Negated Retentive Coil M
262. program blocks and other data preceded with the special Start of Sequence command and ending with the End of Sequence command if communications with the programming device performing the store is interrupted or any other failure occurs which terminates the download the PLC Sequence Store Failure fault is logged As long as this fault is present in the system the PLC will not transition to RUN mode ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 3 3 Fault Explanations and Correction 1 7 PLC Fault Table Display The PLC Fault Table screen displays PLC faults such as password violations PLC configuration mismatches parity errors and communications errors For example 140 CPU prog SETUP FOLDER UTILTY PRINT ET 7307300778 gt PLC FAULT TABLE TOP FAULT DISPLAYED 00005 TABLE LAST CLEARED 01 22 05 42 30 TOTAL FAULTS 00005 ENTRIES OVERFLOWED 00000 PLC DATE TIME 01 22 05 51 18 FAULT FAULT DATE TIME LOCATION DESCRIPTION M D 5 System configuration mismatch 01 22 05 50 45 Password access failed 01 22 05 49 24 Application stack overflow 01 22 05 48 58 Application stack overflow 01 22 05 48 58 Failed battery signal 01 22 05 42 30 ID STOP FAULT ONLINE 4 ACC WRITE LOGIC ONFIG EQUAL NPSNLESSON LESSON REPLACE To display the PLC Fault Table screen press PLC Fault F3 from the PLC Control a
263. pter System Operation ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 3 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 1 12 RESET Coil R The RESET coil sets a discrete reference OFF if the coil receives power flow The reference remains OFF until the reference is reset by another coil The last solved SET coil or RESET coil of a pair takes precedence RESET coils write an undefined result to the transition bit for the given reference Refer to the information on Transitions and Overrides in chapter 3 System Operation Example In the following example the coil represented by 1 is turned ON whenever reference E2 or E6 is ON The coil represented by E1 is turned OFF whenever reference E5 or E3 is ON When the level of coil checking is SINGLE you can use a specific M 960 reference with only one Coil but you can use it with one SET Coil and one RESET Coil simultaneously When the level of coil checking is WARN MULTIPLE or MULTIPLE then each reference can be used with multiple Coils SET Coils and RESET Coils With multiple usage a reference could be turned ON by either a SET Coil or a normal Coil and could be turned OFF by a RESET Coil or by a normal Coil 1 13 Retentive SET Coil SM Retentive SET and RESET coils are similar to SET and RESET coils but they are retained across power failure or when the PLC transitions from STOP to RUN mode retentive SET coil sets a discre
264. put R overrides the enable EN and always resets the sequencer When R is active the current step number is set to the value passed in via the step number parameter If no step number is passed in step is set to 1 All of the bits in the sequencer are set to 0 except for the bit pointed to by the current step which is set to 1 When EN is active and R is not active the bit pointed to by the current step number is cleared The current step number is either incremented or decremented based on the direction parameter Then the bit pointed to by the new step number is set to 1 When the step number is being incremented and it goes outside the range of 1 lt step number lt LEN it is set back to 1 When the step number is being decremented and it goes outside the range of 1 lt step number lt LEN it is set to LEN The parameter ST is optional If it is not used the BITSEQ operates as described above except that no bits are set or cleared Basically the BITSEQ then just cycles the current step number through its legal range 6 5 1 Memory Required for Bit Sequencer Each bit sequencer uses three words registers of R memory to store the following information current step number word 1 length of sequence in bits 2 control word word 3 When you enter a bit sequencer you must enter a beginning address for these three words registers directly below the graphic representing the function see
265. put or output scan is performed ST ST is the starting address or set of input or output points or words to be serviced END END is the ending address or set of input or output points or words to be serviced ALT For the input scan ALT specifies the address to store scanned input point word values For the output scan ALT specifies the address to get output point word values from to send to the I O modules For Model 331 and higher CPUs the ALT parameter can have an effect on speed of DOIO function block execution see Note below and the paragraph on the enhanced DO I O function for 331 and higher CPUs on page 1 95 pP ok The ok output is energized when the input or output scan completes normally For Model 331 and higher CPUs the ALT parameter of the DOIO function block can be used to enter the slot of a single module in the main rack When that is done the DOIO function block will execute in 80 microseconds instead of the 236 microseconds required when the block is programmed without the ALT parameter No error checking is performed to prevent overlapping reference addresses or module type mismatches 9 2 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow 1 Q WT PS G R WAI WAQ const none e Validreference or place where power flow through the function Input Example 1 In the following example when the enabling input 10001 is ON references 10001 to 10064 are scanned and 26Q0001 15 turned on A copy
266. quivalent of real data The original data is not changed by this function This function is only available on the 352 CPU When the function receives power flow it performs the conversion making the result available via output Q The function passes power flow when power is received unless the specified conversion would result in a value that is outside the range to FFFFh enable ok TO WORD value to be converted IN 0 output parameter 0 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 87 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 8 5 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the conversion is performed IN IN contains a reference for the value to be converted to WORD ok The ok output is energized when the function is performed without error Q Q contains the unsigned integer form of the original value in IN 8 5 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow I T S G ZAI WAQ const none enable IN ok e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Example 510002 IREAL WORD 500001 SROOOI IN Q RO003 HI LIM __ LOW_LIM R0003 8 6 TRUN INT
267. r 2 3 1 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed contains a constant or reference for the first value used in the operation I1 is on the left side of the mathematical equation as I1 I2 12 12 contains constant or reference for the second value used in the operation 12 is on the right side of the mathematical equation as in I1 I2 ok The ok output is energized when the function is performed without overflow unless an invalid operation Occurs Q Output Q contains the result of the operation 3 1 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow 905 enable 12 ok Q Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Valid reference for INT data only not valid for DINT or REAL Constants are limited to values between 32768 and 32767 for double precision signed integer operations The default type is INT for 16 bit or single register operands Press F10 to change the Types selection to DINT 32 bit double word or REAL for the CPU352 only PLC INT values occupy a single 16 bit register AI or DINT values require two consecutive registers with the low 16 bits in the first word and the upper 16 bits with the sign in second word REAL values in the CPU352 only also occupy a 32 bit double register with the sign in the high bit followed by the exponent and mantissa e Page 4 24 Alspa
268. r JUMP TESTI is active power flow is transferred to LABEL TESTI Example of non nested JUMP 510001 1 10 gt 2 5 1 Example of a nested JUMP 510001 1 1 1 9 9 mN TEST1 4 102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 7 LABEL The LABEL instruction functions as the target destination of a JUMP Use the LABEL instruction to resume normal program execution after a JUMP instruction There can be only one LABEL with a particular label name in a program Programs without a matched JUMP LABEL pair can be created and stored to the PLC but cannot be executed Alspa P8 25 35 05 software supports two forms of the LABEL function a non nested and a nested form The non nested form LABELO1 must be used with the non nested JUMP function _ gt gt LABELO1 The nested form LABELO1 nested must be used with the nested JUMP function N gt gt LABELO1 The LABEL instruction has no inputs and no outputs there can be nothing either before or after a LABEL in a rung Non nested LABEL Nested LABEL nested Example In the following examples power flow from JUMP TESTI is resumed starting at LABEL TESTI Example of a non nested LABEL TEST1 Example of a nested LABEL TEST1
269. r Memory address 2 Status Pointer Offset address 3 Idle Timeout Value address 4 Maximum Communication Time address 5 i address 6 Data Block to address 133 Information required for the command block can be placed in the designated memory area using an appropriate programming function enable REQ first word of block IN FT rack slot number SYSID task ID 5 __ 6 6 2 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is energized the communications request is performed IN IN contains the first word of the command block SYSID SYSID contains the rack number most significant byte and slot number least significant byte of the target device TASK TASK contains the task ID of the process on the target device FT FT is energized if an error is detected processing the COMMREQ ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 73 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 6 6 3 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow 1 Q WT 905 G enable 9 WAQ const IN SYSID TASK e e Validreference place where power flow through the function Example In the following example when enabling input M0020 is ON a command block located starting at R0016 is sent to communications task in
270. r block has a length of 2 words Page 4 106 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 9 3 1 To Read the Current Word Count Enter SVCREQ function 6 with this parameter block 0 address ignored address 1 After the function executes the function returns the current checksum in the second word of the parameter block No range is specified for the read function the value returned is the number of words currently being checksummed 0 address current word count address 1 9 9 3 2 To Set New Word Count Enter SVCREQ function 6 with this parameter block 1 address new word count address 1 Entering 1 causes the PLC to adjust the number of words to be checksummed to the value given in the second word of the parameter block For either the 331 or 311 CPU the number can be either 0 or 8 in the 212 CPU the value can be either 0 or 4 This Service Request 15 not available 80 05 Micro PLCs ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 107 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Example In the following example when enabling contact FST_SCN is set the parameter blocks for the checksum task function are built Later in the program when input 9610137 turns on the number of words being checksummed is read from the PLC operating system This number is increased by 16 with the results of the A
271. ram Logic Scan or Solution 2 116 Outp tScan ete e RD Re ee EDO ddr qne 2 1 1 7 Logic Program Checksum Calculation 2 1 2 Programmer Communications Window 2 1 3 System Communications Window Models 331 and higher 2 107 1 4 PCM Communications with the PLC Model 331 and higher 2 17 1 5 Standard Program Sweep Variations 2 1 1 5 1 Constant Sweep Time Mode 2 1 1 5 2 Sweep When STOP Mode 21 1 6 Key Switch on 351 352 CPUs Change Mode and Flash Protect AE 1 6 1 Using the Release 7 and Later Key Switch 2 1 1 6 2 Clearing the Fault Table with the Key Switch a 2 PROGRAM ORGANIZATION AND USER REFERENCES DATA 2 11 2 1 Subroutine Blocks Alspa C80 35 PLC only 2 11 2 1 1 Examples of Using Subroutine Blocks 2 1 2 1 3 How Subroutine Blocks are Called 2 1 2 1 8 2 1 2 2 User References Ste
272. reference address are enabled during a CPU sweep the current values of the timers will be the same This update occurs as long as the enabling logic remains ON When the current value equals or exceeds the preset value PV the function begins passing power flow to the right The timer continues accumulating time until the maximum value is reached When the enabling parameter transitions from ON to OFF the timer stops accumulating time and the current value is reset to zero a42933 ENABLE C D E ENABLE goes high timer begins accumulating time Current value reaches preset value PV Q goes high and timer continues accumulating time ENABLE goes low Q goes low timer stops accumulating time and current time is cleared ENABLE goes high timer starts accumulating time ENABLE goes low before current value reaches preset value PV Q remains low timer stops accumulating time and is cleared to zero I address 3 words ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 13 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 2 3 1 Parameters Parameter Description address The TMR uses three consecutive words registers of R memory to store the following e Current value CV word 1 Preset value PV word 2 e Control word word 3 When you enter an TMR you must enter an address for the location of these three consecutive words registers directly below the grap
273. rete references Conditional logic must be used to control the flow of power to a coil Coils cause action directly they do not pass power flow to the right If additional logic in the program should be executed as a result of the coil condition an internal reference should be used for that coil or a continuation coil contact combination may be used Coils are always located at the rightmost position of a line of logic A rung may contain up to eight coils The type of coil used will depend on the type of program action desired The states of retentive coils are saved when power is cycled or when the PLC goes from STOP to RUN mode The states of non retentive coils are set to zero when power is cycled or the PLC goes from STOP to RUN mode Page 4 2 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Table 4 2 Types of Coils Type of Coil Display Power to Coil Result Normally ON Setreference ON Open OFF Set reference OFF Negated ON Set reference OFF OFF Set reference ON Retentive M ON Set reference ON retentive OFF Set reference OFF retentive Negated M ON Set reference OFF retentive Retentive OFF Set reference ON retentive Positive OFF ON If reference is OFF set it ON for one sweep Transition Negative Transition l ON lt OFF If reference is OFF set it ON for one swee
274. rganization and User References Data OK is set ON if the function is performed without overflow unless one of the invalid REAL operations occurs IN 0O IN is NaN Not a Number Otherwise OK is set to OFF enable SERIE ox INT input parameter IN IN output parameter Q 3 3 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed IN IN contains a constant or reference for the value whose square root is to be calculated If IN is less than zero the function will not pass power flow ok The ok output is energized when the function is performed without overflow unless an invalid operation occurs Q Output Q contains the square root of IN ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 29 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 3 3 2 Valid Memory Types M T 905 1 Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Valid reference for INT data only not valid for DINT or REAL o T Constants are limited to values between 32768 and 32767 for double precision signed integer operations Example In the following example the square root of the integer number located at 1001 is placed into the result located at R0003 whenever 10001 is ON 510001 1 1 I ISQRT_ INT 1001 IN Q 380003 3 4 Tr
275. rivilege level from the PLC The Alspa P8 25 35 05 programmer then requests the PLC to move to the highest unprotected level thereby giving the programmer access to the highest unprotected level without having to request any particular level When the Hand Held Programmer is connected to the PLC the PLC reverts to the highest unprotected level ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 31 System Operation 5 2 Privilege Level Change Requests A programmer requests a privilege level change by supplying the new privilege level and the password for that level A privilege level change is denied if the password sent by the programmer does not agree with the password stored in the PLC s password access table for the requested level The current privilege level is maintained and no change will occur If you attempt to access or modify information in the PLC using the Hand Held Programmer without the proper privilege level the Hand Held Programmer will respond with an error message that the access is denied For an explanation of how to set passwords and change the password privilege level refer to chapter 5 PLC Control and Status in the ALS 52201 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa C80 35 C80 25 80 05 PLCs User s Manual 5 3 Locking Unlocking Subroutines Subroutine blocks can be locked and unlocked using the block locking feature of Alspa P8 25 35 05 software as
276. rs Table B 11 lists possible fault actions Table B 11 I O Fault Actions Fault Action oe Action Taken by CPU Informational Log fault in fault table fault in fault table Diagnostic Log fault in fault table Set fault references Fatal Log fault in fault table Set fault references Go to STOP mode 2 9 I O Fault Specific Data An I O fault table entry may contain up to 5 bytes of I O fault specific data 2 10 Symbolic Fault Specific Data Table B 12 lists data that is required for block circuit configuration Table B 12 I O Fault Specific Data Decimal Number Hex Code Description Circuit Configuration 1 Circuit is an input tristate 2 Circuit is an input 3 Circuit is an output 2 11 Fault Actions for Specific Faults Forced unforced circuit faults are reported as informational faults All others are diagnostic or fatal The model number mismatch I O type mismatch and non existent I O module faults are reported in the PLC fault table under the System Configuration Mismatch group They are not reported in the I O fault table 2 12 I O Fault Time Stamp The six byte time stamp is the value of the system clock when the fault was recorded by the PLC CPU Values are coded in BCD format Table 13 I O Fault Time Stamp Byte Number Description 1 Seconds 2 Minutes 3 Hours 4 Day of the month 5 Month 6 Year Page 12 Alspa C80 35
277. ructions to correct the fault Chapter 3 contains the following paragraphs Paragraph Title Description Page 1 Fault Handling Describes the type of faults that may occur in the Alspa 35 or 80 25 Er PLC and how they are displayed in the fault tables Descriptions of the PLC and T O fault table displays are also included For information on using CTRL F to access additional fault information refer to appendix B Interpreting Fault Tables Using AlspaP8 25 35 05 Micro Software 2 PLC Fault Table Provides a fault description of each PLC fault and instructions to correct the 1 Explanations fault 3 Fault Table Describes the Loss of I O Module and Addition of I O Module fault 738 Explanations categories Additional information on faults and fault handling may be found in the ALS 5220 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa C80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs User s Manual For information on detecting and correcting errors in Statement List programs and the Hand Held Programmer refer to the ALS 52202 Hand Held Programmer for Alspa C80 35 C60 25 and C80 05 PLCs User s Manual ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 3 1 Fault Explanations and Correction 1 FAULT HANDLING This information on fault handling applies to systems programmed using Alspa P8 25 35 05 software Faults occur in the Alspa 80 35 80 25 or M
278. s If the CPU is in STOP mode and the CPU is configured to not scan I O in STOP mode the input scan is skipped 1 1 5 Application Program Logic Scan or Solution The application program logic scan is when the application logic program actually executes The logic solution always begins with the first instruction in the user application program immediately following the completion of the input scan Solving the logic provides a new set of outputs The logic solution ends when the END instruction is executed The application program is executed by the ISCP and the 80C188 microprocessor In the Model 313 and higher CPUs the ISCP executes the boolean instructions and the 80C188 or 80386 EX executes the timer counter and function blocks In the Model 311 and 25 CPUs the 80C188 executes all boolean timer counter and function block instructions On the Micro the H8 processor executes all booleans and function blocks Many program control capabilities are provided by the control functions described in chapte Control Functions list of execution times for each programming function can be found in appendix A 1 1 6 Output Scan Outputs are scanned during the output scan portion of the sweep immediately following the logic solution Outputs are updated using data from Q for discrete outputs and AQ for analog outputs memory as appropriate If the N80 Communications Module is configured to transmit global data then data from
279. s Complement Value A Bit data type is the smallest unit of memory It has two states 1 or 0 A BIT string may have length N A Byte data type has an 8 value The valid range is 0 to 255 0 to FF in hexadecimal A Word data type uses 16 consecutive bits of data memory but instead of the bits in the data location representing a number the Register 1 bits are independent of each other Each foe 16 bit positions represents its own binary state 1 or 0 and the bits are not looked at together to 16 1 represent an integer number The valid range of word values is 0 to FFFF Four digit BCD numbers use 16 bit data memory locations Each BCD digit uses four bits and can represent numbers between 0 and 9 This BCD coding of the 16 bits has a legal value range of 0 to 9999 Register 1 4 3 2 1 4 BCD digits 1613 9 5 1 REAL Floating Point Real numbers use 32 consecutive bits ac tually two consecutive 16 bit memory locations The range of numbers that can be stored in this format is from 1 401298E 45 to 3 402823E 38 32 E 16 1 Refer to B Using Floating Two s Complement Value Point Numbers for IEEE format Register 2 Register 1 S Sign bit 0 positive 1 negative ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 21 System Operation 2 6 Syst
280. s a common identification in the PLC with the loop number defined by an operator interfacedevice The loop number is displayed under the block address when logic is monitored from the Alspa 8 25 35 05 software Algorithm 01 Anunsigned integer that is set by the PLC to identify what algorithm is being used by the function block The ISA algorithm is defined as algorithm 1 and the independent algorithm is identified as algorithm 2 Sample Period 02 The shortest time in 10 millisecond increments between solutions of the PID algorithm For example use a 10 fora 100 millisecond sample period The UINT value can be up to 65535 fora sample period of 10 9 minutes If it is 0 the algorithm is solved every time the block is called see section below on PID block scheduling The PID algorithm is solved only if the current PLC elapsed time clock is at or later than the last PID solution time plus this Sample Period Remember that the 80 35 will not use a solution timeless than 10 milliseconds see Note on 9 10 so sweeps will be skipped for smaller sweep times This function compensates for the actual time elapsed since the last execution within 100 microseconds Ifthis value is set to 0 the function is executed each time it is enabled however itis restricted to a minimum of 10 milliseconds as noted above Dead INT values defining the upper and lower Dead Band limits in PV Counts If no Dead Band 03 04 is requ
281. s and compare them to a specified value or copy a specified number of data elements use the table functions described in chapter 117 Table Functions ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 1 3 Introduction 3 9 Dol O To perform an immediate I O update of rack mounted modules in the system use the DO I O function described in chapter 4 9 Control Functions 3 10 Communicate with Other Modules If the CPU must communicate with an intelligent module in the system for example to send data to a PCM use a COMMREQ function See chapter 194 Control Functions 3 11 Special Services from the PLC Use the SVCREQ function described in chapter 134 Control Functions to 1 2 3 9 Change read the checksum task state and number of words to checksum Change read the time of day clock state and values Shut down the PLC Clear the fault tables Read the last logged fault table entry Read the elapsed time clock Read the I O override status Read Master Checksum Interrogate I O 10 Read Elapsed Power Down Time 3 12 Rung Explanation To add rung comment text to the program use the COMMENT function described in chapter 14 Control Functions 3 13 Control Functions Use the MCR function to execute part of the program with negative logic or the JUMP function to skip part of the program entirely See chapter 4 13 Control Functions for information Page 1 4 Als
282. s not of the same type that the configuration file indicates should be in that slot or when the configured rack type does not match the actual rack present Correction Identify the mismatch and reconfigure the module or rack Error Code 18 Name Unsupported Hardware Description A PCM or PCM type module is present in a 311 313 or 323 or in an extension rack Correction Physically correct the situation by removing the PCM or PCM type module or install a CPU that does support the PCM Error Code 26 Name Module busy config not yet accept by module Description The module cannot accept new configuration at this time because it is busy with a different process Correction Allow the module to complete the current operation and re store the configuration Error Code 51 Name END Function Executed from SFC Action Description The placement of an END function in SFC logic orin logic called by SFC will produce this fault refer to the Note on pagp 4 97 for more information about the END function and SFC logic Correction Remove the END function from the SFC logic or logic being called by the SFC logic 2 5 Option Module Software Failure The Fault Group Option Module Software Failure occurs when a non recoverable software failure occurs on a PCM or ADC module The fault action for this group is Fatal Error Code Name Description Correction All COMMREQ Frequency Too High COMMREQs are being sent to a module fa
283. screte temporary 2 global data 2 1 system references system status 2 19 22 1 DIV 4 27 Division function 4 27 DNCTR 4 17 Do function 4 9 enhanced DO I O function for the model 331 and 341 CPUs 4 91 DOIO 4 9 enhanced IO for the model 331 and 341 CPUs 4 9 Double precision signed integer 2 27 Down counter EDITLOCK 2 377 Elapsed time clock 2 237 END 4 97 End function 4 97 ALS 52102 Index End master control relay function 4 1 ENDMCR 4 10 7 Enhanced DO I O function for the model 331 and 341 CPUs 4 97 4 3 Equal function 4 3 Error codes EXP 4 3 Exponential functions 4 34 power of e mo power of X 4 3 EXPT 4 37 External I O failures 3 7 F Fatal faults 3 communications failure during store 3 1 corrupted user program on power up id option module software failure PLC CPU system software failure 3 1 program block checksum failure 3 IT system configuration mismatch 3 TE Fault action 3 diagnostic faults 3 fatal faults 3 t I O fault action informational faults a PLC fault action B T Fault actions 3 1 Fault category 3 187 Fault description 3 1 Fault effects additional 3 1 Fault explanations and correction 3 accessing additional fault information 3 9 addition of I O module 3 19 application fault 3 1 communications failure during stor
284. sends the CPU a service request the request is queued for processing during the system communications window START a43067 RECEIVED REQUEST QUEUE REQUEST Figure 2 4 PCM Communications with the PLC 1 5 Standard Program Sweep Variations In addition to the normal execution of the standard program sweep certain variations can be encountered or forced These variations described in the following paragraphs can be displayed and or changed from the PLC Control and Status menu in Alspa P8 25 35 05 programming software or using the Hand Held Programmer For more information refer to chapter 5 PLC control and Status in the ALS 52201 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa C80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs User s Manual or the ALS 52202 Hand Held Programmer for Alspa C80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs User s Manual 1 5 1 Constant Sweep Time Mode In the standard program sweep each sweep executes as quickly as possible with a varying amount of time consumed each sweep An alternative to this is the CONSTANT SWEEP TIME mode where each sweep consumes the same amount of time Use a constant sweep when I O points or register values must be polled at a constant frequency such as in control algorithms You can achieve this by setting the Configured Constant Sweep which will then become the default sweep mode thereby taking effect each time the PLC goes from STOP to RUN mode A value from 5 to 200 millisecon
285. sharing the same fault description For more information about using CTRL F refer to appendix B Interpreting Fault Tables Using Alspa P8 25 35 05 Software in this manual The error code is the first two hexadecimal digits in the fifth group of numbers as shown in the following example 01 000000 01030100 0902 0200 000000000000 Error Code first two hex digits in fifth group Some faults can occur because random access memory on the PLC CPU board has failed These same faults may also occur because the system has been powered off and the battery voltage is or was too low to maintain memory To avoid excessive duplication of instructions when corrupted memory may be a cause of the error the correction simply states Perform the corrections for Corrupted Memory This means 1 If the system has been powered off replace the battery Battery voltage may be insufficient to maintain memory contents 2 Replace the PLC CPU board The integrated circuits on the PLC CPU board may be failing The following table enables you to quickly find a particular PLC fault explanation in this section Each entry is listed as it appears on the programmer screen Fault Description Loss of or Missing Option Module Reset of Addition of or Extra Option Module System Configuration Mismatch Option Module Software Failure Program Block Checksum Failure Low Battery Signal Constant Sweep Time Exceeded Application Fault No User Progra
286. sition coil 4 Power flow 2 267 Power of e function 4 37 Power of X function 4 31 Power down 2 297 Power up 2 27 Power up and power down sequences 2 217 power down 2207 power up 2 2 PRG 2 27 Privilege level change requests 2 37 Privilege levels A change requests 2 7 Program block how subroutines are called 2 17 subroutine block 2 11 Program block checksum failure 3 11 Program organization and user data floating point numbers E f Program organization and user references data 2 1 A 2 27 function block structure 2 2 retentiveness of data 2 20 system status 2 2 transitions and overrides 2 20 user references 2 137 Program structure how subroutines are called 2 11 subroutine block 2 137 Program sweep standard 2 7 Programmer communications window 2 7 Index 13 Index Programming instructions 4 bit operation functions wn control functions 4 9 conversion functions 4 data move functions 4 6 instruction mnemonics C math functions relational functions 31 relay functions 4 table functions timers and counters 1 Proportional Integer Deviation PID 4 123 R RESET coil 4 retentive coil retentive RESET coil 4 19 retentive SET coil 4 67 SET coil 4 1 RESET coil 4 67 Reset of addition of or extra option module 3 10 Retentive coil 4
287. so that CV is the negative of the PID output rather than the normal positive value Set the fourth bit to 1 to modify the Derivative Action from using the normal change in the Error term to the change in the PV feedback term The low 4 bits in the Config Word are defined in detail below BitO0 Error Term When this bit is set to 0 the error term is SP PV When this bit is set to 1 the error term is PV SP Bit1 Output Polarity When this bit is set to 0 the CV output represents the output of the PID calculation When it is set to 1 the CV output represents the negative of the output of the PID calculation Bit2 Derivativeaction on PV When this bit is set to 0 the derivative action is applied to theerror term When it is setto 1 the derivative actionis applied to PV remaining bits should be zero Bit 3 Deadbandaction When the Deadband action bit is set to zero then no deadband action 15 chosen If the error 15 within the deadband limits then the error is forced to be zero Otherwise the error is not affected by the deadband limits If the Deadband action bit is set to one then deadband action is chosen If the error is within the deadband limits then the error is forced to be zero If however the erroris outside the deadband limits then the error is reduced by the deadband limit error error deadband limit Bit4 Anti resetwindup action When this bitis set to zero the anti reset windup action uses areset b
288. st receives power flow it starts accumulating time current value When this timer is encountered in the ladder logic its current value is updated If multiple occurrences of the same timer with the same reference address are enabled during a CPU sweep the current values of the timers will be the same Page 4 10 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set When the current value equals or exceeds the preset value PV output Q is energized As long as the timer continues to receive power flow it continues accumulating until the maximum value is reached Once the maximum value is reached it is retained and output Q remains energized regardless of the state of the enable input a42931 ENABLE Oo L eser f Ls D E FG A ENABLE goes high timer starts accumulating B Current value reaches preset value PV Q goes high C RESET goes high Q goes low accumulated time is reset D RESET goes low timer then starts accumulating again E ENABLE goes low timer stops accumulating Accumulated time stays the same F ENABLE goes high again timer continues accumulating time G Current value becomes equal to preset value PV Q goes high Timer continues to accumulate time until ENABLE goes low RESET goes high or current value becomes equal to the maximum time H ENABLE goes low timer stops accumulating time When power flow to the tim
289. ster than it can process them Change the PLC program to send COMMREQs to the affected module at a slower rate ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 3 11 Fault Explanations and Correction 2 6 Program Block Checksum Failure The Fault Group Program Block Checksum Failure occurs when the PLC CPU detects error conditions in program blocks received by the PLC It also occurs when the PLC CPU detects checksum errors during power up verification of memory or during RUN mode background checking The fault action for this group is Fatal Error Code All Name Program Block Checksum Failure Description The PLC Operating Software generates this error when a program block is corrupted Correction 1 Clear PLC memory and retry the store 2 Displaythe PLC fault table on the programmer Contact Cegelec PLC Field Service giving them all the information contained in the fault entry 2 7 Low Battery Signal The Fault Group Low Battery Signal occurs when the PLC CPU detects a low battery on the PLC power supply or a module such as the PCM reports a low battery condition The fault action for this group is Diagnostic Error Code 0 Name Failed Battery Signal Description The CPU module or other module having a battery battery is dead Correction Replace the battery Do not remove power from the rack sd Name Low Battery Signal Description A battery
290. string If you want the input string to be shifted the output parameter Q must use the same memory location as the input parameter IN The entire shifted string is written on each scan that power is received Output B2 is the last bit shifted out For example if four bits were shifted B2 would be the fourth bit shifted out 1 WORD word to be shifted IN B2 last bit shifted out LEN 100001 number of bits N output parameter bit shifted in B1 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 47 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 5 4 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the shift is performed IN INcomamsthefistwordtobeshied 00000000000 IN the number of places bits that the array is to be shifted B1 contains the bit value to be shifted into the array 11 B2 B2 contains the bit value of the last bit shifted out of the array o Q Output Q contains the first word of the shifted array LEN the number of words in the array to be shifted sd 5 4 2 Valid Memory Types jm Bp EROS E e Valid reference place where power may flow through the function
291. sts the memory manager to deallocate a block of system memory and the deallocation fails This error can only occur during the execution of a DO I O function block Correction 1 Display the PLC fault table on the programmer Contact Cegelec PLC Field Service giving them all the information contained in the fault entry 2 Perform the corrections for corrupted memory Error Code 10 Name Invalid Scan Request of the I O Scanner Description The PLC operating software I O Scanner generates this error when the operating system or DO function block scan requests neither a full nor a partial scan of the I O This should not occur in a production system Correction Display the PLC fault table on the programmer Contact Cegelec PLC Field Service giving them all the information contained in the fault entry Error Code 13 Name PLC Operating Software Error Description The PLC operating software generates this error when certain PLC operating software problems occur This error should not occur in a production system Correction 1 Display the PLC fault table on the programmer Contact Cegelec PLC Field Service giving them all the information contained in the fault entry 2 Perform the corrections for corrupted memory ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 3 15 Fault Explanations and Correction Error Code 14 27 Name Corrupted PLC Program Memory Description
292. t Down the PLC Clear Fault Tables Read Last Logged Fault Table Entry Read Elapsed Time Clock Read I O Override Status Read Master Checksum Interrogate I O Read Elapsed Power Down Time PID Provides two PID proportional integral derivative closed loop control algorithms Lt 23 Standard ISA PID algorithm PIDISA Independent term algorithm PIDIND Page 4 90 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 1 CALL Use the CALL function to cause program execution to go to a specified subroutine block When the CALL function receives power flow it causes the scan to go immediately to the designated subroutine block and execute it After the subroutine block execution is complete control returns to the point in the logic immediately following the CALL instruction Example The following example screen shows the subroutine CALL instruction as it appears in the calling block By positioning the cursor within the instruction you can press F10 to zoom into the subroutine 1510004 0001 110006 1 1 1 CALL ASTRO SUBROUTINE 10003 310010 500010 1 a N 1910001 The 80 05 Micro PLCs do not accommodate subroutines therefore the CALL function is inappropriate for use with a 80 05 Micro PLC
293. t all the bits in a word or group of words specified number of places to the right When the shift occurs the specified number of bits is shifted out of the output string to the right As bits are shifted out of the low end of the string the same number of bits is shifted in at the high end LSB A string length of 1 to 256 words can be selected for either function If the number of bits to be shifted N is greater than the number of bits in the array LEN 16 or if the number of bits to be shifted is zero then the array Q is filled with copies of the input bit B1 and the input bit is copied to the output power flow B2 If the number of bits to be shifted is zero then no shifting is performed the input array is copied into the output array and input bit B1 is copied into the power flow The bits being shifted into the beginning of the string are specified via input parameter B1 If a length greater than 1 has been specified as the number of bits to be shifted each of the bits is filled with the same value 0 or 1 This can be The boolean output of another program function All 15 To do this use the special reference nickname ALW_ON as a permissive to input 1 All Os To do this use the special reference nickname ALW_OFF as a permissive to input 1 The SHL or SHR function passes power flow to the right unless the number of bits specified to be shifted Output Q is the shifted copy of the input
294. t passwords may be read This includes all data memories 961 00 R etc fault tables and all program block types data value and constant No values may be changed in the PLC Level 2 This level allows write access to the data memories I R etc Level 3 This level allows write access to the application program in STOP mode only Level 4 This is the default level for systems which have no passwords set The default level for a system with passwordsis to the highest unprotected level This level the highest allows read and write access to all memories as well as passwords in both RUN and STOP mode Configuration data cannot be changed in RUN mode 5 1 Passwords There is one password for each privilege level in the PLC No password can be set for level 1 access Each password may be unique however the same password can be used for more than one level Passwords are one to four ASCII characters in length they can only be entered or changed with the Alspa P8 25 35 05 software or the Hand Held Programmer A privilege level change is in effect only as long as communications between the PLC and the programmer are intact There does not need to be any activity but the communications link must not be broken If there is no communication for 15 minutes the privilege level returns to the highest unprotected level Upon connection of the PLC the Alspa P8 25 35 05 programmer requests the protection status of each p
295. t the DINT type is actually a signed value The calculation is correct until the time since power on reaches approximately 50 years CONST 00016 RO127 M0233 M0234 CONST 00016 R0131 Page 4 118 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 9 9 SVCREQ 18 Read I O Override Status Use SVCREQ function 18 in order to read the current status of overrides in the CPU This feature is available only for 331 or higher CPUs For this function the parameter block has a length of 1 word It is an output parameter block only 0 No overrides are set 1 Overrides are set SVCREQ 18 reports only overrides of I and Q references address Example In the following example the status of I O overrides is always read into location R1003 If any overrides are present output 0001 is set ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 119 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 9 10 SVCREQ 23 Read Master Checksum Use SVCREQ function 23 to read the master checksums for the user program and the configuration The SVCREQ output is always set to ON if the function is enabled and the output block of information see below starts at the address given in parameter 3 PARM of the SVCREQ function When a RUN MODE STORE is
296. ta type Relational functions operate on these types of data Data Type Description INT Signed integer DINT Double precision signed integer REAL Floating point The REAL data type is only available on the 352 CPU Also the Range function block does not accept REAL type Additionally the S0020 bit is set ON when a relational function using REAL data executes successfully It is cleared when either input is NaN Not a Number The default data type is signed integer To compare either signed integers double precision signed integers or real numbers select the new data type after selecting the relational function To compare data of other types or of two different types first use the appropriate conversion function described in 13 Conversion Functions to change the data to one of the integer types If input parameters I1 and I2 match the specified relation output Q receives power flow and is set ON 1 otherwise it is set OFF 0 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 35 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set enable MEE NN INT input parameter I1 I1 output parameter input parameter I2 I2 4 1 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed contains a constant or reference for the first value to be compared I1 is on the left side o
297. te reference ON if the coil receives power flow The reference remains ON until reset by a retentive RESET coil Retentive SET coils write an undefined result to the transition bit for the given reference Refer to the information on Transitions and Overrides in chapter 2 System Operation Page 4 6 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 1 14 Retentive RESET Coil RM This coil sets a discrete reference OFF if it receives power flow The reference remains OFF until set by a retentive SET coil The state of this coil is retained across power failure or when the PLC transitions from STOP to RUN mode Retentive RESET coils write an undefined result to the transition bit for the given reference Refer to the information on Transitions and Overrides in chaptef 2 System Operation 1 15 Links Horizontal and vertical links are used to connect elements of a line of ladder logic between functions Their purpose is to complete the flow of logic power from left to right in a line of logic You can not use a horizontal link to tie a function or coil to the left power rail You can however use 9057 the AWL ON always on system bit with a normally open contact tied to the power rail to call a function every sweep Example In the following example two horizontal links are used to connect contacts E2 and E5 A vertical link is used to conne
298. tely transitions into a special ERROR SWEEP mode The only activity permitted when the PLC is in this mode is communications with the programmer The only way to clear this condition is to cycle power on the PLC The fault action for this group is Fatal Error Code 1 through B Name User Memory Could Not Be Allocated Description The PLC operating software memory manager generates these errors when software requests the memory manager to allocate or de allocate a block or blocks of memory from user RAM that are not legal These errors should not occur in a production system Correction Displaythe PLC faulttable on the programmer Contact Cegelec PLC Field Service giving them all the information contained in the fault entry Error Code D Name System Memory Unavailable Description The PLC operating software I O Scanner generates this error when its request for a block of system memory is denied by the memory manager because no memory is available from the system memory heap It is Informational if the error occurs during the execution of a DO I O function block It is Fatal if it occurs during power up initialization or auto configuration Correction Displaythe PLC faulttable on the programmer Contact Cegelec PLC Field Service giving them all the information contained in the fault entry Error Code E Name System Memory Could Not Be Freed Description The PLC operating software I O Scanner generates this error when it reque
299. tep Output to Process PV Unit Reaction Curve Input from Process 1 K 0 632 K ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 133 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set The following process model parameters can be determined from the PV unit reaction curve K Process open loop gain final change PV change in CV at time Note no subscript on Tp Process or pipeline time delay or dead time after 0 before the process output PV starts moving Tc First order Process time constant time required after Tp for PV to reach 63 2960f the final PV Usually the quickest way to measure these parameters is by putting the PID block in Manual mode and making a small step in CV output by changing the Manual Command 13 and plotting the PV response over time For slow processes this can be done manually but for faster processes a chart recorder or computer graphic data logging package will help The CV step size should be large enough to cause an observable change in PV but not so large that it disrupts the process being measured A good size may be from 2 to 10 of the difference between the CV Upper and CV Lower Clamp values 9 10 10 Setting User Parameters Including Tuning Loop Gains As all PID parameters are totally dependent on the process being controlled there are no predetermined values that will work however it is usually a simple iterative procedure to find acceptable
300. ter an address for the location of these three consecutive words registers directly below the graphic representing the function Note Do not use this address with another down counter up counter or any other instruction or improper operation will result Caution Overlapping references will result in erratic operation of the counter enable On a positive transition of enable the current value is decremented by one R When R receives power flow it resets the current value to the preset value PV PV is the value to copy into the counter s preset value when the counter is enabled or reset Q Output Q is energized when the current value is less than or equal to zero 2 6 2 Valid Memory Types address enable 4 Q e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function none In the following example the down counter identified COUNTP counts 500 new parts before energizing output Q0005 NEW_PRT 500005 gt DNCTR NXT BAT CONST 0500 COUNTP Page 4 20 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Example In the following example the PLC is used to keep track of the number of parts contained in a temporary storage area There are two ways of accomplishing this fun
301. th of the parameter block depends on the data format BCD format requires 6 words packed ASCII requires 12 words 0 read time and date address 1 set time and date 1 BCD format address 1 3 packed ASCII format data address 2 to end In word 1 specify whether the function should read or change the values 0 read 1 change In word 2 specify a data format 1 BCD 3 packed ASCII with embedded spaces and colons Words 3 to the end of the parameter block contain output data returned by a read function or new data being supplied by a change function In both cases format of these data words is the same When reading the date and time words address 2 through address 8 of the parameter block are ignored on input ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 109 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Example In the following example when called for by previous logic a parameter block for the time of day clock is built to first request the current date and time and then set the clock to 12 noon using the BCD format The parameter block is located at global data location R0300 Array NOON has been set up elsewhere in the program to contain the values 12 0 and 0 Array NOON must also contain the data at R0300 The BCD format requires six contiguous memory locations for the parameter block _ FST_SCN 4MOVE 4
302. the I O modules listed below may not be available at the time this manual is printed For current availability consult your local Cegelec PLC distributor or Cegelec sales representative Refer to the ALS 52118 Alspa C80 35 PLC I O Module Specifications for the specifications and wiring information of each Model 35 I O module Table 2 9 Model 35 I O Modules Catalog Number Points Description Manual Number Discrete Modules Input IC693MDL230 120 VAC Isolated ALS 52118 IC693MDL231 240 VAC Isolated ALS 52118 IC693MDL240 120 VAC ALS 52118 IC693MDL241 24 VAC DC Positive Negative Logic ALS 52118 IC693MDL632 125 VDC Positive Negative Logic ALS 52118 IC693MDL634 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic ALS 52118 IC693MDL645 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic ALS 52118 IC693MDL646 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic FAST ALS 52118 CF693MDL 100 48 VDC Positive Negative Logic FAST ALS 52118 IC693MDL654 5 12 VDC TTL Positive Negative Logic ALS 52118 IC693MDL655 24 VDC Positive Negative Logic ALS 52118 IC693ACC300 Input Simulator ALS 52118 Discrete Modules Output IC693MDL310 12 120 VAC 0 5A ALS 52118 IC693MDL330 8 120 240 VAC 2A ALS 52118 IC693MDL340 16 120 VAC 0 5A ALS 52118 IC693MDL390 5 120 240 VAC Isolated 2A ALS 52118 IC693MDL730 8 12 24 VDC Positive Logic 2A ALS 52118 IC693MDL731 8 12 24 VDC Negative Logic 2A ALS 52118 IC693MDL732 8 12 24 VDC Positive Logic 0 5A ALS 52118 IC693MDL733 8 12 24 VDC Negative Logic 0 5A ALS 52118 IC
303. the only JUMP instruction that can be used in a Release 1 C80 35 PLC The nested JUMP function can be used and is suggested for use for all new applications Also please note that the 351 and later CPUs support only nested jumps Non nested jumps are not supported on 351 and later CPUs The nested form of the JUMP instruction has the form N gt gt LABELO1 where LABELOI is the name of the corresponding nested LABEL instruction It is available in Release 2 and later releases of Alspa P8 35 25 05 software and PLC firmware A nested JUMP instruction can be placed anywhere within a program as long as it does not occur in the range of any non nested MCR or non nested JUMP There can be multiple nested JUMP instructions corresponding to a single nested LABEL Nested JUMPs can be either forward or backward JUMPs Both forms of the JUMP instruction are always placed in columns 9 and 10 of the current rung line there can be nothing after the JUMP instruction in the rung Power flow jumps directly from the instruction to the rung with the named label ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 101 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Non nested JUMP ee __ Nested JUMP avoid creating an endless loop with forward and backward JUMP instructions a backward JUMP must contain a way to make it conditional Example In the following examples wheneve
304. the programmer is in OFFLINE mode no faults are displayed In ONLINE or MONITOR mode I O fault data is displayed In ONLINE mode faults can be cleared this feature may be password protected Once cleared faults which are still present are not logged again in the table ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 3 7 Fault Explanations and Correction 1 9 Accessing Additional Fault Information The fault tables displayed by Alspa P8 software contain basic information regarding the fault Additional information pertaining to each fault can be displayed by positioning the cursor on the fault entry and pressing the Zoom F10 softkey from the PLC or I O fault table screen For more information about this fault zoom feature refer to chapter 5 PLC Control and Status in the ALS 52201 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Programming Software for Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs User s Manual In addition a hexadecimal dump of the fault can be obtained by positioning the cursor on the fault entry and pressing the CTRL F key sequence For more information about using CTRL F refer to appendirB Interpreting Fault Tables Using Alspa 25 35 05 Software in this manual The last entry Correction for each fault explanation in this chapter lists the action s to be taken to correct the fault Note that the corrective action for some of the faults includes the statement Display the PLC Fault Table on the Programmer Cont
305. ther device The sequence of operations necessary to execute a program one time is called a sweep In addition to executing the logic program the sweep includes obtaining data from input devices sending data to output devices performing internal housekeeping servicing the programmer and servicing other communications The Alspa 80 35 Alspa 80 25 and Micro PLCs normally operate in Standard Program Sweep mode Other operating modes include STOP with I O Disabled mode STOP with I O Enabled mode and Constant Sweep mode Each of these modes described in this chapter is controlled by external events and application configuration settings The PLC makes the decision regarding its operating mode at the start of every sweep ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 2 1 System Operation 1 1 Standard Program Sweep Standard Program Sweep mode normally runs under all conditions The CPU operates by executing an application program updating I O and performing communications and other tasks This occurs in a repetitive cycle called the CPU sweep There are seven parts to the execution sequence of the Standard Program Sweep 1 2 Start of sweep housekeeping Input scan read inputs Application program logic solution Output scan update outputs Programmer service Non programmer service Diagnostics All of these steps except programmer service execute every sweep Programmer service onl
306. tion requests build up to the point that the PLC has less than a minimum amount of memory available the communication request will be faulted and not processed Correction Issue fewer communication requests or otherwise reduce the amount of mail being exchanged within the system Error Code 5A Name User Shut Down Requested Description The PLC operating software function blocks generates this informational alarm when Service Request No 13 User Shut Down executes in the application program Correction None required Information only alarm 2 10 No User Program Present The Fault Group No User Program Present occurs when the PLC CPU is instructed to transition from STOP to RUN mode or a store to the PLC and no user program exists in the PLC The PLC CPU detects the absence of a user program on power up The fault action for this group is Informational Correction Download an application program before attempting to go to RUN mode ALS 52102 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 3 13 Fault Explanations and Correction 2 11 Corrupted User Program on Power Up The Fault Group Corrupted User Program Power Up occurs when the PLC CPU detects corrupted user RAM The PLC CPU will remain in STOP mode until a valid user program and configuration file are downloaded The fault action for this group is Fatal Name Correction Name Correction Error Code
307. to the output modules If outputs should be written to the output modules from internal memory other than Q or AQ the beginning reference can be specified for ALT The range of outputs written to the output modules is specified by the starting reference ST and the ending reference END Execution of the function continues until either all inputs in the selected range have reported or all outputs have been serviced on the I O cards Program execution then returns to the next function following the DO I O If the range of references includes an option module HSC APM etc then all of the input data I and WAD or all of the output data Q and AQ for that module will be scanned The ALT parameter is ignored while scanning option modules Also the reference range must not include an Enhanced NCM module The function passes power to the right whenever power is received unless Not all references of the type specified are present within the selected range The CPU is not able to properly handle the temporary list of I O created by the function The range specified includes I O modules that are associated with a Loss of I O fault enable starting address ST Page 4 92 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 25 55 05 Instruction Set 9 2 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled a limited in
308. to the right whenever power is received enable EEO ok WORD input parameter I1 I1 output parameter input parameter I2 I2 5 1 1 Parameters Parameter Description enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed contains a constant or reference for the first word of the first string 12 12 contains a constant or reference for the first word of the second string ok The ok output is energized whenever enable is energized Q Output Q contains the result of the operation 5 1 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow 1 Q qe E dq pss G R WAI WAQ const none fo Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function 98 SB or PSC only 905 cannot be used ono 4 42 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set Example In the following example whenever input 10001 is set the 16 bit strings represented by nicknames WORD 1 and WORD2 are examined The results of the Logical AND are placed in output string RESULT 1 10001 1 1 1 AND_ WORD WORD1 I1 RESULT WORD2 2 sss ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25
309. tra Data date ce pula Go ee B 19 1 Corrupted User RAM B 1 9 2 PLC CPU Hardware Failure RAM Failure B 1 10 PLC Fault Time Stamp B 2 VO FAULT TABLE tic ey EE eR nU SIRO DER EE B 9 2 1 Long ShortIndicator B 10 2 2 Reference Addressee a O E B 10 2 32 TVO Fault Address a tet eel qe de B 10 2 RaKk oaan B 1 2 9 o e CP B 1 2 0 es ces cq ree Slavia doce RC ONU e nga ice UO B 1 2 4 Fault Group B 1 2 8 Pault ACUOB siais sees ne RU e oye a CR RU B 177 29 Fault Specific Data B 17 2 10 Symbolic Fault Specific Data B 17 2 11 Fault Actions for Specific 5 B 17 2 12 Fault Time Stamp B 17 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 17 Contents APPENDIX INSTRUCTION MNEMONICS C 1 APPENDIX KEY FUNCTIONS D
310. trol word stores the state of the boolean inputs and outputs of its associated function block as shown in the following format 1514 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 E Reserved Reserved Reset input Enable input previous execution Q counter timer status output EN enable input Bits 0 to 13 are used for timer accuracy bits to 11 are not used for counters Use care if you use the same address for PV as the second word in the block of three words If PV is not a constant the PV is normally set to a different location than the second word Some applications choose to use the second word address for the PV such as using R0102 when the bottom data block starts at RO101 This allows an application to change the PV while the timer or counter is running Applications can read the first CV or third Control words but the application cannot write to these values or the function will not work 22 ONDTR A retentive on delay timer ONDTR increments while it receives power flow and holds its value when power flow stops Time may be counted in tenths of a second the default selection hundredths of a second or thousandths of a second The range is 0 to 32767 time units The state of this timer is retentive on power failure no automatic initialization occurs at power up When the ONDTR fir
311. ts ALT N Toggle display options CTRL E Display last system error ALT T Start Teach mode F12 or Keypad Toggle discrete reference ALT Q Stop Teach mode F11 or Keypad Override discrete reference ALT n Playback file n n 0 to 9 Keys Available in the Program Editor Only ALT B Toggle text editor bell Keypad Accept rung ALT D Delete rung element Delete rung Enter Accept rung ALT S Store block to PLC and disk CTRL PgUp Previous rung ALT X Display zoom level CTRL PgDn Next rung ALT U Update disk Horizontal shunt ALT V Variable table window Vertical shunt ALT F2 Go to operand reference table Go to the next operand field Special Keys ALT O Password override Available only on the Password screen in the configuration software The Help table on the next page contains a listing of the key help and also the instruction mnemonics help text for Alspa P8 25 35 05 software ALS 52102 c en Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page D 1 Key Functions Alspa P8 Key Help ALT K Key Sequence Description Keys Available throughout the Software Package ALT A Abort ALT C Clearfield ALT M Change Programmer mode ALT R Change PLC Run Stop state ALT E Toggle status area ALT J Toggle the command line ALT L List directory files ALT P Print screen ALT H Help ALT K Key help ALT I Instruction mnemonic help ALT T Start Teach mode ALT
312. tual modules present and compare them with the rack slot configuration generating addition loss and mismatch alarms as if a store configuration had been performed This SVCREQ will generate faults on both the PLC and I O fault tables depending on the fault This function has no parameter block and always outputs power flow The time for this SVCREQ to execute depends on how many faults exist Therefore execution time of this SVCREQ will be greater for situations where more modules are at fault Example In the following example when input 10251 is ON the actual modules are interrogated and compared to the rack slot configuration Output 00001 is turned on after the SVCREQ is complete 10251 500001 l C REQ CONST FNC 0026 580050 PARM This Service Request is not available 80 05 Micro PLCs ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 121 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 9 12 SVCREQ 29 Read Elapsed Power Down Time Use the SVCREQ function 29 to read the the amount of time elapsed between the last power down and the most recent power up The SVCREQ output is always set to ON and the output block of information see below starts at the address given in parameter 3 PARM of the SVCREQ function This function is available only in the 331 or higher CPUs This function has an output parameter block only The parameter bloc
313. up has its own set of error codes Table B 3 shows error codes for the PLC Software Error Group Group 87H Table B 3 Alarm Error Codes for PLC CPU Software Faults Decimal Hexadecimal Name 20 1 Corrupted PLC Program Memory 2 Corrupted PLC Program Memory 52 Backplane Communications Failed 5 User Shut Down Requested Allothers PLC CPU Internal System Error Page B 6 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Interpreting Faults Using Alspa P8 25 35 05 Software Table B 4 shows the error codes for all the other fault groups Table B 4 Alarm Error Codes for PLC Faults Decimal Hexadecimal Name PLC Error Codes for Loss of Option Module Group 44 Option Module Soft Reset Failed 45 Option Module Soft Reset Failed 255 Option Module Communication Failed Error Codes for Reset of Addition or Extra Option Module Group 2 2 Module Restart Complete Allothers Reset of Addition of or Extra Option Module Error Codes for Option Module Software Failure Group 1 1 Unsupported Board Type e COMREQ mailbox full on outgoing message that starts the COMREQ 3 3 COMREQ mailbox full on response 5 5 Backplane Communications with PLC Lost Request 11 Resource alloc tbl ovrflw etc error 13 D User program error OOW 191 Module Software Corrupted Requesting Reload Error Codes for System Configuration Mis
314. ure no automatic initialization occurs at power up Page 4 16 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 2 4 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow 961 Q M T S G R AI AQ const none address enable e Valid reference or place where power may flow through the function Example In the following example an OFDT timer is used to turn off an output 70000001 whenever an input 100001 turns on The output is turned on again 0 3 seconds after the input goes off cx M 100001 9000001 OFDT 0 105 CONST CV 00003 R00019 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual Page 4 17 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 2 5 UPCTR The Up Counter UPCTR function is used to count up to a designated value The range is 0 to 32767 counts When the up counter reset is ON the current value of the counter is reset to 0 Each time the enable input transitions from OFF to ON the current value is incremented by 1 The current value can be incremented past the preset value PV The output is ON whenever the current value is greater than or equal to the preset value The state of the UPCTR is retentive on power failure no autom
315. ut IN and places the result in output Q For the LOG function the base 10 logarithm of IN is placed in Q For the LN function the natural logarithm of IN is placed in Q For the EXP function is raised to the power specified by IN and the result is placed in Q For the EXPT function the value of input is raised to the power specified by the value 12 and the result is placed in output Q The EXPT function has three input parameters and two output parameters The ok output will receive power flow unless IN is NaN Not a Number or is negative enable REAL input parameter IN output parameter 0 3 5 1 Parameters Paramete Description r enable When the function is enabled the operation is performed IN IN contains the real value to be operated on ok The ok output is energized when the function is performed without overflow unless an invalid operation occurs and or IN is NaN or is negative Q Output Q contains the logarithmic exponential value of IN The LOG LN EXP and EXPT functions are only available on the model 352 CPU Page 4 32 Alspa C80 35 C80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 Alspa 8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 3 5 2 Valid Memory Types Parameter flow Q T S G R WAI WAQ const none enable
316. w 1 Q M T S G R AI AQ const none enable IN ok e Valid reference or place where power flow through the function o Valid for REAL_TRUN_INT only Example In the following example the displayed constant is truncated and the integer result 562 is placed in 6 T0001 REAL TRUN INT CONST IN QI T0001 5 62987 02 ALS 52102 Alspa 80 35 80 25 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual 4 89 Alspa P8 25 35 05 Instruction Set 9 CONTROL FUNCTIONS This paragraph describes the control functions which may be used to limit program execution and alter the way the CPU executes the application program Refer to chaptef 2 1 PLC Sweep Summary for information the CPU sweep Function Description Page CALL Causes program execution to go to a specified subroutine block 91 DOIO Services for one sweep a specified range of inputs or outputs immediately inputs or T outputs on a module are serviced if any reference locations on that module are included in the DO I O function Partial I O module updates are not performed Optionally a copy of the scanned I O can be placed in internal memory rather than the real input points END Provides a temporary end of logic The program executes from the first rung to the last rung Bag or the END instruction whi
317. y occurs if a board fault has been detected or if the programming device issues a service request The sequence of the standard program sweep is shown in the following figure Page 2 2 Alspa C80 35 80 25 and 80 05 PLCs Reference Manual ALS 52102 ALS 52102 START OF SWEEP HOUSEKEEPING VO ENABLED INPUT SCAN YES LOGIC SOLUTION VO ENABLED YES OUTPUT SCAN PROGRAMMER COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM COMMUNICATIONS USER PROGRAM CHECKSUM CALCULATION START NEXT SWEEP HOUSEKEEPING AN PROGRAM d E EXECUTION OF PLC DATA OUTPUT PROGRAMMER SERVICE SYSTEM COMMUNICATIONS DIAGNOSTICS Figure 2 1 PLC Sweep Alspa 80 35 C80 25 and C80 05 PLCs Reference Manual System Operation a43064 Page 2 3 System Operation As shown in the PLC sweep sequence several items are included in the sweep These items contribute to the total sweep time as shown in the following table Table 2 1 Sweep Time Contribution Description Time Contribution ms 4 Sweep Element Micro 211 311 313 331 341 351 Housekeeping Calculate sweep time 0 368 0 898 0 714 0 705 0 424 0 279 Schedule start of next sweep Determine mode of next sweep Update fault reference tables Reset watchdog timer Data Input Input data is received from input and Sef Table 2 2 for scan time contributions option modules Program User logic is solved
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search